{"title":"A\/V Racks and Cabinets","description":"","products":[{"product_id":"pangea-audio-vulcan-3-shelf-audio-rack-rosenut-shelves","title":"Pangea Audio Vulcan 3-Shelf Audio Rack - Rosenut Shelves","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Pangea Audio Vulcan — A Rack You Build by Hand and Keep Adding To\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMost racks arrive as a fixed thing. You choose a height, you live with it, and when the system grows you start again. The Vulcan was drawn the other way round. Steel tubes thread onto rods by hand, shelves clamp between them, and another level goes on whenever you want one — up to six.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt has been made this way long enough to be recognized for it. Positive Feedback gave the Vulcan line a Writers’ Choice Award in 2017, and the rack has changed very little since, because the design was right the first time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill It Take Your Whole System?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePut a Heavy Amp on Any Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery shelf carries 75 pounds, and that figure is the same whether it is the bottom level or the one under the top. There is no weak shelf to plan around, so the heaviest box in your system goes wherever the cable runs are shortest rather than wherever the rack allows.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSwap the Posts, Change the Clearance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe rack ships with 7.25 inches of clear height between the upper shelves and 8.75 inches above the bottom one. That gap is set by the posts, and posts come out. Fit the 10-inch set and a tall tube amplifier has room; fit the 5.25-inch set and a slim streamer stops wasting the space above it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf is 23.75 inches wide and 18 inches deep, but measure your widest component against the 19.4 inches clear between the side supports. That is the figure that decides, not the shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAdd a Level Whenever the System Grows\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThis is the reason to buy a Vulcan rather than something cheaper. An add-on shelf arrives as one part with its four posts already in the box, so a three-shelf rack becomes a four without a second order. Turn the rack upside down, add the level from the bottom, set it back on its feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSix shelves is the ceiling, and the same threads accept storage drawers, rolling casters and an LP shelf that holds a hundred records. See the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eadd-on shelves\u003c\/a\u003e when the system outgrows what you have, and add one level at a time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYour Turntable Belongs on the Top Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNothing sits above it there, so the dust cover opens through its full arc and the deck ends up as far as it can from everything else that is running. A thicker 21mm top platform is available if yours is unusually heavy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy It Doesn’t Wobble\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration and speakers put more into the room, so a rack either passes it along or holds still against it. Holding still is a question of how stiff the frame is once together, and the Vulcan is stiffer than flat-pack racks usually manage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Makes It Stiff Enough to Stay Still\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach steel support tube has a threaded rod running down the middle of it. Tightening the rod pulls the tubes and the shelf between them into one clamped column rather than a stack of parts resting on each other. That is why it does not develop a wobble after a month.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes That Bite, Discs That Protect\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eCone-point feet with adjustable steel spikes couple the rack through carpet to the floor underneath and level it on boards that are never quite flat. Four Mini Sonic Saucers come in the box so the spikes can be used on wood or tile without marking either.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eNothing Here Traps the Heat\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe frame is open on all four sides, which is something no closed cabinet can offer. Heat leaves a warm component through its top and its flanks, and on a Vulcan neither route is blocked by a panel or a door.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe post system helps here too. A warm-running amplifier can be given a 10-inch gap while a thin streamer sits in a shorter one, rather than every component getting the same clearance whether it needs it or not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eNo Tools. About Fifteen Minutes.\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNothing in the box needs a screwdriver, a wrench or a hex key. The threaded rods hide inside the support tubes, and you turn the tubes by hand until each shelf is clamped. Most people have the whole rack standing in about a quarter of an hour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet the spikes before any gear goes on. Leveling is much easier with empty shelves, and getting it right at the start saves lifting a loaded rack to reach a foot later on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePick the Finish That Disappears Into Your Room\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack, Rosenut, Espresso and Carbon Fiber, all on the same steel frame. The shelves are dense MDF wrapped in a vinyl skin that resists scuffs and wipes clean, and the lines are plain enough to sit quietly beside furniture you already own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJoe at GadgetryTech built one and loaded it before judging it. “Once assembled the rack was incredibly sturdy,” he wrote, adding that it “showed no signs of flex or wobble when shifting the weight around which was critical for me.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSteve Lefkowicz gave the Vulcan line a Writers’ Choice Award in the 14th Annual Positive Feedback Writers’ Choice Awards for 2017, an award he gives to gear he keeps using rather than gear he merely measured.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOur own walkthrough of the Vulcan, what it is made of and how the shelves go together:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/L4ZPMrHKrgk\" title=\"Pangea Audio's Vulcan Audio Rack – Audio Advisor\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJames Graham unboxes one and builds it start to finish, so you can watch the hand-tighten step before yours arrives:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/BhVyWcBU7wE\" title=\"Pangea Vulcan Audio Rack: Unboxing and Assembly\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAnd GadgetryTech’s review, which covers the add-on shelves and the post swap:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/q_9YajnZfes\" title=\"Pangea Vulcan Rack Review – Affordable and High Quality Modular Audio Racks\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Pangea Audio Vulcan Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want a rack you can put together tonight — no tools come out of the drawer and most people are done in about fifteen minutes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own something heavy — 75 pounds per shelf means the big amplifier goes wherever you want it, not just on the bottom.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour system is still changing — add levels one at a time up to six in all, with the four posts already in the box.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou have a component that does not fit a standard gap — swap in 5.25, 7.25, 8.75 or 10-inch posts and set the clearance yourself.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want the rack to match the room — four finishes on the same frame, and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e underneath your source if you want to go further.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eVulcan add-on shelves and posts\u003c\/a\u003e — the shelf and its four posts arrive together, so one order adds one level.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — put them between a component and its shelf where the source deserves more than the rack alone.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is where it belongs, and there is a thicker 21mm version if yours is heavy.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — work out your runs from the shelf you actually plan to use, since the rack lets you move things later.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSeventy-five pounds, and that is per shelf rather than a figure shared across the rack. It is the same on every level, so a heavy power amplifier does not have to live on the bottom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my tall amplifier fit between the shelves?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt ships with 7.25 inches between the upper shelves and 8.75 inches above the bottom one. If your amplifier needs more, 10-inch posts are sold separately and take about a minute each to change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, up to six shelves in total. The Vulcan add-on shelf comes as one kit with its four posts included, so there is no second part to remember. Flip the rack over and the new level goes on from the bottom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo tools at all. The steel tubes thread onto rods by hand and clamp each shelf as you tighten them, which most people finish in about fifteen minutes. All the hardware is in the box, including the floor discs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere should the turntable go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the top platform, where nothing sits above it and the dust cover swings freely. It also puts the deck as far as possible from whatever is generating heat and vibration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the warranty?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTwo years. If something is wrong with the rack when it arrives, call us at 800-942-0220 and we will sort it out rather than send you to a form.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Pangea Audio","offers":[{"title":"Rosenut","offer_id":45980516122797,"sku":"NEW-PGVUL3RK-RNT-BLK","price":199.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/PGVUL3RK_RNT_01_2024__52821.1733856407.1280.1280_533308cc-7777-46af-8fbb-15b29874d00e.jpg?v=1778150747"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-s3-2-two-shelf-audio-rack-walnut","title":"Solidsteel S3-2 Two-Shelf Audio Rack - Walnut","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel S3 — Italian Engineering, Built Around What You Put On It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel has been making audio supports in Italy for more than twenty years, and the S3 is where that experience meets a real-world budget. Anodized aluminum columns, powder-coated steel, and shelves cut from laminated MDF, sized for full-width components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat separates it from furniture is what happens inside the columns. Each one is filled with damping material, so the structure under your system has somewhere to send the vibration it picks up, instead of handing it straight back to the components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill Your Tallest Component Fit?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery shelf measures 580 by 430 millimeters — about 22.8 by 16.9 inches — and is 30 millimeters thick. The top platform gives you that full width. Between the lower shelves the columns bring the usable span to about 19.7 inches, which is still wider than the great majority of full-size components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSet the Shelves Where Your Amplifier Needs Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThis is the part that decides whether your amplifier goes in. Shelf positions adjust from 145 to 365 millimeters apart — 5.7 to 14.4 inches — so a tall tube amplifier or a stacked pair of small boxes can have the room it needs, taken from a shelf that does not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePut Your Heaviest Amplifier on Any Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf carries up to 60 kilograms, or 132 pounds. That is a serious power amplifier per level, not a nominal figure, and it comes from columns that thread together rather than welded joints that flex.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIt Grows With the System\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe S3 is built to be added to. An inner shelf and a set of four poles turn a three-shelf rack into a four, or a four into a five, using the same hardware the rack was assembled with — so the rack you buy now is not the rack you are stuck with.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYour Turntable Goes on the Top Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlways. The top platform has nothing above it, so a dust cover opens freely, and it is the one position where the deck sits farthest from everything else that vibrates. It is also the widest surface on the rack. Browse our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e for the deck to put there.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow It Manages Vibration\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFloors carry vibration. Speakers put it into the room, the room puts it back into the floor, and whatever your components stand on either passes it along or gives it somewhere to go. That is the whole argument for a proper rack rather than a shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy These Columns Don't Ring\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe S3's support poles are anodized aluminum, and each is filled internally with sound-absorbing damping material. A hollow tube rings; a filled one does not. That is the difference between a structure that stores vibration and one that drains it away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes, and Something to Stand Them On\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes on M8 threads couple the rack to the floor and level it on boards that are never quite flat. Stainless steel floor-protective discs come in the box, so the spikes can do their job on a wood floor without marking it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMass in the Right Places\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGalvanized steel under powder coating, anodized aluminum columns, laminated MDF shelves. Three materials with three different resonant behaviors, which is the point — no single frequency finds the whole structure sympathetic, so nothing rings in unison.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eKeeping Your Components Cool\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAn open frame lets air move freely around every side of a component, which is something no closed cabinet can offer. Amplifiers and streamers shed heat upward and sideways, and here there is nothing in the way of either.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe adjustable spacing matters here too. A class-A amplifier that runs warm can be given 14.4 inches of clear air while a thin streamer takes 5.7, rather than every component getting the same gap whether it needs it or not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYou Can Build It by Hand\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe columns thread into the shelves by hand and the spikes screw into the column ends. Solidsteel publishes an official installation guide, linked below, and the sequence is worth watching once before you start — assembling each shelf's hardware upside down first makes the whole job quicker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLevel it with the spikes before anything goes on the shelves, not after. A rack that starts level stays level once it is loaded, and the spikes are far easier to reach with nothing standing on top of them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere It Will Live in Your Room\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack and walnut, both on the same structure. The lines are plain enough to sit quietly beside most furniture, which is usually what you want from something holding several thousand dollars of electronics.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel's own installation guide walks through the assembly step by step:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/AfdyFc5POuA\" title=\"Solidsteel S3 Series - Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYuri Brus looks at the three-shelf S3-3 in use:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/hMzjCuMfauw\" title=\"Solidsteel S3-3 HiFi Rack Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel S3 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want a support engineered rather than styled — damping-filled aluminum columns and 132 pounds a shelf come from an audio company, not a furniture maker.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour components are different heights — adjustable spacing from 5.7 to 14.4 inches means the tall amplifier and the slim streamer each get what they need.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou run a turntable — the top platform is the widest surface on the rack, with nothing above it to limit a dust cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour gear runs warm — an open frame puts air on every side, and you choose how much sits above anything that needs it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou expect the system to grow — add a level whenever you need one with an S3 inner shelf and a set of four poles from our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eadd-on shelves\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rack is the foundation; these are what usually go on it and under it:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet or platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — the S3 handles what comes up through the floor, and these address what a component generates on its own.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is sized and sited for one.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnect cables\u003c\/a\u003e — components spread over several levels need longer runs than a single shelf does.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAn add-on shelf and poles\u003c\/a\u003e — the way an S3 grows a level at a time instead of being replaced.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my tall amplifier fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlmost certainly. Shelf positions adjust from 145 to 365 millimeters apart, which is 5.7 to 14.4 inches of clear height. Measure your tallest component, add room for air above it, and set the shelf to suit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSixty kilograms, or 132 pounds. That is per shelf, and it is the figure Solidsteel publishes for the S3 — a step up from the 110 pounds per shelf of the S2 series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. An S3 inner shelf and a set of four poles with hardware will take a three-shelf rack to four, or a four to five. The parts are the same ones the rack was built from, so the result is a factory rack rather than a modification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe columns thread into the shelves by hand and the spikes screw into the ends. Solidsteel publishes a step-by-step installation guide, which is embedded above — watch it once and the sequence is obvious.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere should the turntable go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the top platform. Nothing sits above it, so the dust cover opens freely, it is the widest surface on the rack, and it puts the deck as far as possible from everything else.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat comes in the box besides the rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes on M8 threads, and a set of stainless steel floor-protective discs so the spikes can be used on a finished floor. The hardware to assemble it is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or getting the most from your components? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45980577530029,"sku":"NEW-SSS3W-2-WAL","price":599.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSS3_2_WAL_01_2023__11672.1708998600.1280.1280_50fc54dd-6688-4f75-a6c7-fcd3ce3bb4d9.jpg?v=1778148859"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-s5-2-two-shelf-audio-rack-with-isolation-platforms-black","title":"Solidsteel S5-2 Two-Shelf Audio Rack with Isolation Platforms - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel S5 — A Second Shelf Floating Above the First\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery level of this rack is two shelves, not one. A structural shelf carries the frame, and a second platform sits above it on four adjustable steel cones seated in cup recesses. Your component never touches the rack itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat is what the isolation platforms in the name actually are, and it is the whole argument for the S5 over Solidsteel’s other racks. It also roughly doubles the mass under each component, which is the other half of the effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill It Take What You Want to Put on It?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Hundred and Twenty-One Pounds a Level\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf carries up to 55 kilograms, or 121 pounds, and that figure is the same whichever level you use. Nothing in a normal system comes close to it, which is the point — the shelf is not working hard, so it stays flat and still.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Bottom Bay Gets Twelve Inches\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the smaller racks the lowest gap is a full 12 inches of clear height, with 8 inches between the levels above it. That bottom bay is where a tall amplifier goes. Taller racks trade some of that height for more levels, so check the size you are buying.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMeasure Against 19.7 Inches\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe usable platform is 19.7 inches wide and 16.9 deep, on a rack 23 inches across overall. Width is what catches people out, so measure your widest chassis against the 19.7-inch figure rather than against the outside of the frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMove the Shelves Where You Want Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel builds the S5 so shelf spacing can be changed at any time rather than being fixed at the factory. A rack bought for one system can be reset for the next one, which is not something most racks at any price will let you do.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Levels of Decoupling, Not One\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration upward, and the components on a rack add their own. Most racks answer that once, at the feet. The S5 answers it twice, and the second answer is the one underneath your equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCones Into Cups, Under Every Component\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe upper platform rests on four adjustable Solidsteel cones dropped into cup recesses inset in the shelf below. Contact happens at four points rather than across a flat face, and the platform can be leveled independently of the rack it sits on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFilled Aluminum Below That\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe support tubes are aluminum filled with StratoCell sound-absorbing foam, the same construction Solidsteel uses right across the S range. A hollow tube rings when something excites it, where a filled one has very little left to give back.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes and Pads at the Floor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes carry the whole rack, reaching through carpet to the floor beneath and leveling it on boards that are never quite true. S Series steel floor pads are included for hardwood and tile.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eNothing Encloses the Electronics\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo back, no sides, no doors. Warm air leaves a component upward and sideways into open air, which no closed cabinet can offer whatever is cut into its panels, and cables reach the back of everything without a struggle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe floating platforms help here in a way that is easy to miss. Each one stands clear of the shelf below it on its four cones, so there is a layer of air underneath every component as well as all around it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSet the Cones, Then the Spikes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel publishes a step-by-step installation guide for the series, embedded below, and it is worth watching once before the carton is opened. The rack bolts together and the platforms go on last.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLevel the rack on its floor spikes first, with the shelves empty. Then set each upper platform on its four cones and check it sits without rocking. Doing it in that order means adjusting one thing at a time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePlain Enough to Live With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEnnobled MDF under a polymer laminate, in black, on aluminum supports. The lines are quiet and the rack is 23 inches across, so it sits beside furniture rather than dominating a room the way a wide rack does.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel’s official installation guide for the S5 series, including how the upper platforms seat on their cones:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/6RhUmoa_5Kw\" title=\"Solidsteel S5 Series – Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel S5 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want isolation built into the rack — a second platform on four cones under every component, not just spikes at the floor.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own something heavy — 121 pounds a level, the same on every shelf, so placement is your choice rather than the rack’s.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour system will change — shelf spacing can be reset at any time, so the rack adapts instead of being replaced.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou have a turntable — the top platform has nothing above it and floats on its own cones, which is the best position this rack offers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want to go further still — the platforms are a clean starting point for \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e under a particular source.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is the one with nothing above it and its own decoupled shelf underneath the deck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — for the one component you want to treat separately, on top of a shelf that is already decoupled.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — plan runs around the tall bottom bay, since that is where the amplifier usually ends up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA phono stage\u003c\/a\u003e — small enough to share a level, and it benefits as much as the deck from a platform that is not touching the frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat are the isolation platforms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach level is two shelves. The lower one is structural; the upper one rests on four adjustable steel cones seated in cup recesses, so your component sits on a platform that is not in direct contact with the rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eUp to 55 kilograms, which is 121 pounds, and it applies to every level including the top. That is the figure for the shelf as a whole, platform included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my amplifier fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the smaller racks the bottom bay gives 12 inches of clear height, with 8 inches between the levels above. Check your chassis width against the 19.7 inches of usable platform, which is narrower than the frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I change the shelf spacing later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Solidsteel builds the S5 so spacing can be adjusted at any time, so a rack set up for one system can be reset when the components change rather than replaced.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt bolts together, and Solidsteel publishes a step-by-step guide which is embedded above. Level the rack on its spikes while it is empty, then set each upper platform on its cones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it mark my floor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eS Series steel floor pads are included to sit under the adjustable spikes, which is what you want on hardwood or tile. On carpet the spikes can reach through to the floor beneath.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45980582052013,"sku":"NEW-SSS5-2-BLK","price":699.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSS5_2_01_2023__34088.1708997989.1280.1280_577a82e4-a558-4e1e-84d1-4e1000518ade.jpg?v=1778149033"},{"product_id":"salamander-archetype-2-0-2-shelf-audio-rack-walnut-wood","title":"Salamander Archetype 2.0 -2-Shelf Audio Rack - Walnut Wood","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Salamander Archetype — Shelves That Go Exactly Where You Want Them\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMost racks decide the spacing for you. Four threaded steel rods run the height of an Archetype, and every shelf is held between nuts and washers that you can put anywhere along them. There are no notches, no pegs and no fixed positions to design your system around.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSalamander has built it this way since the company started, and the idea has outlasted several generations of the equipment it holds. A rack whose shelves move is a rack you can keep when the components change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Will It Hold, and Where?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Hundred and Fifty Pounds Per Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat is the figure for every shelf on every Archetype, and it is a long way beyond what most racks in this class manage. A heavy power amplifier is not a problem to be solved here, and there is no bottom-shelf-only rule to work around.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePut the Shelves Where Your Gear Needs Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpacing is set by where you tighten the nuts, so it is continuous rather than stepped. A tall tube amplifier and a slim streamer can sit on the same rack with completely different clearances, decided by what you own rather than by where a notch happened to fall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMeasure Against 19.25 Inches, Not the Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf is 23 inches wide and 16 deep in three-quarter-inch wood, but the usable figure is the 19.25 inches of clear space between the steel rods. That is what your widest component has to pass, so start there when you are checking whether something fits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Different Ways to Make It Bigger\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA single shelf adds a level inside the rack you already own, threading onto the same rods. The other route is the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-stacking-kit-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype Stacking Kit\u003c\/a\u003e — four coupling nuts that join two complete racks into one taller one. Those are different jobs, so order by what you actually want.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Rubber Washers Are the Point\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration and every component on a rack puts some of its own into the frame. What matters is whether that travels on to the next shelf, and on an Archetype the answer is designed rather than accidental.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eNeoprene Above and Below Every Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf is clamped between steel nuts and washers, with energy-damping neoprene washers sitting between the hardware and the wood on both faces. Nothing rigid touches the shelf itself, so the steel rods are not a direct path from one component to the next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eChoose What Meets the Floor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe rack stands on its own feet as it comes, and what happens underneath is up to you. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-mega-spikes-set-of-4-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMega Spikes\u003c\/a\u003e couple it through carpet to the floor below; casters let you roll the whole thing out to reach the back of everything.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eGive the Hot Box the Gap It Needs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAn open frame with no back panel, no sides and no doors lets air move freely past every face of a component. That is a property of the design itself, and no closed cabinet can offer it however many vents have been cut into the panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable spacing matters more here than on most racks. A class-A amplifier that runs warm can be given several inches of clear air above it while a slim source takes the minimum, instead of every component getting an identical gap.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Building It Actually Involves\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour rods, and a stack of nuts and washers for each shelf. You thread the hardware on, slide a shelf down to where you want it, and tighten from both sides. Work out your spacing before you start and the job goes in one pass rather than two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet the height of every shelf while the rack is empty, with a tape measure and the tallest component beside you. The same hardware that makes the spacing adjustable is what you would otherwise be loosening later with gear in your way.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eReal Wood, and Black Steel Through It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack, Cherry and Walnut, in real wood rather than a printed wrap, which is why the grain differs from shelf to shelf. The threaded rods and hardware are black on every finish — a deliberate constant, so the frame reads the same whichever wood you choose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eShelves are three-quarters of an inch thick and carry their own weight visually as well as structurally. This is the line to pick when the rack has to sit in a room with furniture in it rather than in a dedicated listening space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHome Theater Review put the five-shelf Archetype through a full write-up. “These are high-quality racks that offer more than their price point would lead you to believe,” the reviewer concluded, calling the shelving “infinitely adjustable.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWriting in August 2008, the same reviewer called it “an affordable and completely flexible system that will proudly hold the finest of AV gear in style” — and the rack has not changed since.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA full build of an Archetype from the box up, which is worth watching once before you plan your shelf heights:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/142p7kzgWsw\" title=\"How to Build the Salamander Archetype\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAnd Salamander’s own walkthrough of the system and what can be added to it:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/7fgLcBrh2_Q\" title=\"Salamander rAVe Podcast – Archetype\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Salamander Archetype Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own something genuinely heavy — 150 pounds per shelf is the figure on every level, so the big amplifier goes wherever you want it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour components are different heights — shelf spacing is continuous rather than stepped, so each one gets the clearance it actually needs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want real wood in the room — Black, Cherry and Walnut in solid finishes, sized to sit among furniture rather than dominate it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour system will change — add a single shelf inside the rack, or join two racks with the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-stacking-kit-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eStacking Kit\u003c\/a\u003e when one is no longer enough.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want to reach behind everything — an \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-drawer-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype drawer\u003c\/a\u003e for accessories and casters underneath make the back of the system reachable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype single shelves\u003c\/a\u003e — a shelf and its hardware, threading onto the rods you already have, in the finish to match.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-stacking-kit-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype Stacking Kit\u003c\/a\u003e — four coupling nuts that join two racks into one taller unit when adding a shelf is no longer enough.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — between a component and its shelf, where a source deserves more than the rack alone provides.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — work out your runs after you have set the shelf heights, since the spacing is yours to decide.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA hundred and fifty pounds, per shelf rather than shared across the rack, and the same on every level. The shelf itself is three-quarters of an inch of wood on 5\/8-inch threaded steel rods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my tall amplifier fit between the shelves?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlmost certainly, because you decide the gap. The shelves clamp anywhere along the rods, so measure your tallest component and set the spacing to suit it. Check its width against the 19.25 inches clear between the rods too.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, in two different ways. A single shelf threads onto the rods you already have to add a level inside the rack. The Stacking Kit instead joins two complete racks together, which is the route to take when one rack is full.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is a nuts-and-washers job rather than a snap-together one, and that is the trade for spacing you set yourself. Decide your shelf heights first, with the components measured, and the whole rack goes together in a single pass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the wood real?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The shelves are real wood rather than a printed vinyl wrap, so grain and tone vary a little between shelves and between racks. The threaded rods and hardware are black across every finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat can I add to it later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSingle shelves, the Stacking Kit, a storage drawer, arched bookends, spike feet and two grades of caster. The system was designed to be added to, and the parts still fit racks built many years ago.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:1.6em 0 0 0;font-size:0.9em;\"\u003e\n\u003cimg style=\"vertical-align: middle;padding-right: 5px;\" src=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/p65-warning-icon.png\" width=\"25\" height=\"25\" alt=\"warning icon\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-weight:bold;font-size: 14px;\"\u003eWARNING:\u003c\/span\u003e Cancer and Reproductive Harm - \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.p65warnings.ca.gov\/\" title=\"California Proposition 65 link\" target=\"_blank\" style=\"text-decoration: none;color: #2f84eb;\"\u003ewww.P65Warnings.ca.gov\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ New","offer_id":45980583788717,"sku":"NEW-SMA2-WAL","price":399.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMA2_WAL_01-Large__73178.1713883163.1280.1280_064477fb-6994-4bdb-b6f1-4136bde5d2ed.jpg?v=1778108073"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-model-347-av-cabinet-cherry-aluminum","title":"Salamander Synergy Model 347 AV Cabinet - Cherry - Aluminum","description":"\u003ch3\u003eConsole-Height Four-Door Audio\/Video Cabinet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy Model 347 from Salamander Designs is a console-height four-door audio\/video cabinet. It holds a large amount of gear and will accommodate a large sized TV.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eWith its four side-by-side doors and interior shelves, the Model 347 provides a generous amount of space for your AV components inside the cabinet, along with an the expansive top platform. The 87\"-wide top platform accommodates flat panel TVs up to 90\" and weighing up to 350 lbs. The Model 347 is 31\" tall, and the eight height-adjustable interior shelves hold up to 75 lb. each. The fixed bottom shelf supports up to 350 lb.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eRock-Solid Framework\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eLike all Salamander Synergy-series cabinets, the Model 347 has a 'smart' aluminum skeleton with wood veneer surfaces and solid wood door frames. This rock-solid framework securely holds an array of high performance features while hiding them from view.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eModel 347 is rich with features. Perforated door inserts permit IR signals, add ventilation, and mask speakers. Snap-on hinges fully extend doors and remove easily for better in-cabinet access. Removable rear panel allows easy access to A\/V components. Precision leveling feet keep the cabinet level even on uneven floors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe clever modular design lets you add extra features to your cabinet. A range of attractive finishes blend nicely with any decor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eDimensions and Weight Capacity\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Model 347 is 87\" wide, 31\" high, and 19.75\" deep. It has eight height-adjustable shelves (two per bay) measuring 19.75\" W x 18.5\" D and a fixed bottom shelf. The height-adjustable shelves are 0.5\" thick. The top platform supports up to 350 lb.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45980590473389,"sku":"NEW-SM347-CHE-ALU","price":3499.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SM347_CHEALU_02_2023__14639.1702660150.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778148482"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-twin-20-oc-with-double-width-shelf-walnut-alumium","title":"Salamander Synergy Twin 20 OC with Double-Width Shelf - Walnut\/Alumium","description":"\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e\u003ci\u003eNote: Image shown with the optional doors and side panels.\n\u003c\/i\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eSupport Your TV and Center Channel Speaker\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander adds new functionality to its best-selling Synergy Twin 20 TV rack with the Twin 20 Center by including a double-width shelf for your center channel speaker. This shelf is 44.5\" wide and 19.75\" deep, with 9 inches of vertical height. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis furniture-quality rack enhances both the appearance and performance of home theater equipment. With its rich wood finish and elegant styling, it looks like a piece of fine furniture. But Salamander's Synergy Twin 20 Center TV stand is a hard worker that provides plenty of space for AV components, with a bottom shelf that accommodates two 17\"-wide components. The top platform will support large TVs, including plasma displays up to 42 inches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Salamander Twin 20 Center TV cabinet is a high-end piece of furniture with a mile-deep hardwood finish and exquisitely clean design. The warmth of the rich hardwood finish seems to radiate throughout the entire room. The quality recalls the finest classic American and European cabinetry. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eAdd Doors and Cabinet Sides\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe modular design of the Twin 20 Center lets you add doors, cabinet sides, and other accessories for extra versatility and design possibilities. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eHolds Lots of Gear\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e The 44.5\"-wide top shelf has space for 32\"-42\" flat panel TVs at the ideal height. The bottom shelf accommodates two standard-width components. The Twin 20 Center includes a removable black rear panel with a wire management feature that keeps cables out of sight and out of the way. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Twin 20 Center is 21\" high, 44.5\" wide, and 19.75\" deep. Adjustable level glide feet are included. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cimg style=\"vertical-align: middle;padding-right: 5px;\" src=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/p65-warning-icon.png\" width=\"25\" height=\"25\" alt=\"warning icon\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-weight:bold;font-size: 14px;\"\u003eWARNING:\u003c\/span\u003e Cancer and Reproductive Harm - \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.p65warnings.ca.gov\/\" title=\"California Proposition 65 link\" target=\"_blank\" style=\"text-decoration: none;color: #2f84eb;\"\u003ewww.P65Warnings.ca.gov\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45980599156909,"sku":"NEW-SMSNC20-WAL-ALU","price":999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMKSNC20_WA-LARGE__33512.1705013758.1280.1280_b301958c-59cc-4ee2-a0b4-35a58a2c9d9a.jpg?v=1778116818"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-s20-3-shelf-audio-rack-black-oak-black-posts","title":"Salamander Synergy S20 3-Shelf Audio Rack - Black Oak - Black Posts","description":"\u003ch3\u003eGorgeous Audio\/Video Racks You Can Expand and Customize\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe one sure thing about today's audio and video systems: they never stand still. Changes in technology, improvements in products, and changing listening and viewing habits necessitate frequent changes in the elements within the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eTo keep pace with additions and changes in the audio\/video system, Salvatore Carrabba, Salamander Design's founder and chief design engineer, created the new Synergy modular audio\/video furniture line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eUnique Modular Design can be Easily Changed to Suit any System\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSynergy racks are a modular design. This means you can expand and change the Synergy rack by adding additional shelves, drawers, doors, side panels, casters or another rack extension on top or bottom of the existing cabinet. You can even attach extension shelves to the side of the cabinet to create a complete A\/V entertainment system. Whatever your system, we can build a Synergy rack to suit your need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eInside the Synergy Cabinet...\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy rack consists of an extra large top and base shelf held together by extremely strong and rigid slotted extruded aluminum posts. The slots in the aluminum posts hold the hardware for attaching accessories such as side panels, doors, extra shelves, drawers, etc. A Synergy cabinet can be assembled in minutes using simple tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSimple, Beautiful, and Strong Three-Shelf Synergy S20 Suits Many Systems\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander's S20 three-shelf cabinet offers just the right combination of features and performance for many audio and home theater systems. This beautifully simple 22\"-tall, three-shelf cabinet has one fully adjustable black MDF internal shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Black Oak \/ Black \/ New","offer_id":45980604793005,"sku":"NEW-SMSU20-BLK-BLK","price":549.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSU20_BLK_BLK_01_2024__65196.1707933231.1280.1280_4a11324c-128d-4eed-8bf7-50bfa6d885d0.jpg?v=1778145242"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-s4-2-wide-two-shelf-audio-rack-black","title":"Solidsteel S4-2 Wide Two-Shelf Audio Rack - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel S4 Wide — Two Components on Every Shelf\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThis rack is 43.85 inches across, and that number is the whole idea. Each shelf takes two full-size components standing side by side, so a system spreads out sideways instead of stacking into a tower.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt shares its shelf spacing and its engineering with Solidsteel’s S3 racks, so the two lines sit together in a room without arguing. If you already own an S3, this is the one that matches it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Will a Forty-Four Inch Shelf Hold?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Hundred and Forty-Two Pounds a Level\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf carries up to 242.5 pounds, which is the highest figure anywhere in the S range and a long way past what a pair of components weighs. The shelf is not being asked to work hard, which is how it stays flat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Full-Width Boxes, Side by Side\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA shelf 43.85 inches across and 19.9 deep takes two full-size chassis next to each other rather than one with wasted space around it. A monoblock pair can share a level, and so can a streamer and the amplifier it feeds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHeight Depends on Which One You Buy\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe two-shelf rack gives a generous 12.8 inches between its levels, which suits tall gear. The four-shelf version fits more in and gives 9.6 inches between shelves, matching the S3 series. Measure your tallest component and pick accordingly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLow and Long, or Tall and Long\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe two-shelf stands 18.7 inches high and the four-shelf 35.6, both on the same 43.85 by 19.9-inch footprint. One sits under a wall-mounted screen; the other holds a full system without needing a second rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFilled Aluminum Under Laminated Shelves\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration upward and speakers add more of it through the air. A wide rack has more shelf to keep still than a narrow one, which makes what the supports are made of matter rather more.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSupports That Do Not Ring\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe aluminum supports are filled rather than hollow, the construction Solidsteel developed across its flagship Hyperspike line and brought down into the S range. A hollow tube rings; a filled one has very little to return.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eRigid Shelves, and Spikes at the Floor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe shelves are rigid MDF under a polymer laminate, and the rack stands on adjustable spike feet that reach through carpet and level it on an uneven surface. Protective discs are supplied for hard floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eRoom to Breathe, and Room to Reach\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNothing encloses this rack: no back, no sides, no doors. Two components sharing a level still have open air above and around them, and heat leaves upward and sideways without meeting a panel on the way.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe width pays off behind the rack as well as on it. Cables from two boxes on one shelf have somewhere to go, and reaching an input on the back of either one does not mean moving the other.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eBuild It in the Room\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt bolts together from shelves and supports, and Solidsteel publishes a step-by-step guide for the series, embedded below. The shelves are long, so clear the floor around you before you open anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLevel the rack on its spikes while the shelves are still empty. A wide rack loaded with two rows of components is not something you want to lift afterwards to reach a foot underneath it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eDesigned to Sit Beside an S3\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack shelves in polymer laminate on aluminum supports, with the same clean Italian lines Solidsteel uses across the range. The S4 shares its dimensional character with the S3 series, so the two lines read as one system in a room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe style traces back to the company’s discontinued 7 Series, and the build draws on what was learned making the Hyperspike racks above it. It is the wide member of a family rather than a separate idea.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel’s official installation guide for the S4 series, worth watching before the carton is opened:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/oS5DaCMlg50\" title=\"Solidsteel S4 Series – Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel S4 Wide Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou have wall space rather than height — 43.85 inches across puts two components on every shelf instead of stacking them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own monoblocks — a pair can share one level side by side, with 242.5 pounds of capacity underneath them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou already own an S3 — the S4 shares its shelf spacing and finish, so the two racks sit together as one system.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want the rack low — the two-shelf version stands 18.7 inches high and fits under a wall-mounted screen.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want to go further under a source — the shelves are a clean base for \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e beneath a turntable or DAC.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is long enough to take a deck and leave room for something beside it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — between a component and its shelf, for the one box you want treated separately.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/stereo-amplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003ePower amplifiers\u003c\/a\u003e — a monoblock pair fits on one level here, which a standard-width rack cannot offer.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — runs get longer on a rack this wide, so work them out from where each component will sit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eUp to 242.5 pounds per shelf, the same on every level. That is the highest capacity in Solidsteel’s S range and comfortably more than two full-size components weigh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill two components really fit side by side?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat is what the rack is built for. Each shelf is 43.85 inches wide and 19.9 deep, which takes two full-width chassis next to one another rather than one with empty space around it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much clear height is there between shelves?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt depends on the size. The two-shelf rack gives 12.8 inches, and the four-shelf gives 9.6 inches, which matches the S3 series. Measure your tallest component before choosing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it match my S3 rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The S4 was designed with the same dimensional characteristics as the S3 series and the same MDF shelves in polymer laminate, so the two lines are meant to stand together.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt bolts together from shelves and supports with the hardware supplied, and there is an official step-by-step video above. Allow floor space, because the shelves are long.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it damage my floor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eProtective discs are included to go under the adjustable spikes on hardwood or tile. On carpet the spikes can reach through to the subfloor, which is what gives the rack its footing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45980605218989,"sku":"NEW-SSS42-BLK","price":899.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSS42_01_2024__80032.1707928242.1280.1280_2527ba92-430e-45d7-a721-9aab0514fc53.jpg?v=1778150679"},{"product_id":"salamander-designs-synergy-model-237-black-oak-aluminum","title":"Salamander Designs Synergy Model 237 - Black Oak\/Aluminum","description":"\u003ch3\u003eOne of Salamander's Most Popular AV Cabinets\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy Model 237 is one of the most popular low-boy, triple-door audio\/video cabinets from Salamander Designs. It holds large amount of gear and will accommodate a large sized TV. This cabinet may mounted to the wall by simply removing the feet and attaching the wall mounting accessory. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis cabinet has three side-by-side doors and a generous amount of space for your AV components inside and on the expansive top platform. The 65.75\"-wide top platform accommodates flat panel TVs up to 75\" and weighing up to 350 lbs. The Model 237 is 21\" tall, and its interior shelves hold up to 75 lb. each. The fixed bottom shelf supports up to 350 lb.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003eRock-Solid Framework\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eLike all Salamander Synergy-series cabinets, the Model 237 has a 'smart' aluminum skeleton with wood veneer surfaces and solid wood door frames. This rock-solid framework securely holds an array of high performance features while hiding them from view. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eModel 237 is rich with features. Perforated door inserts permit IR signals, add ventilation, and mask speakers. Snap-on hinges fully extend doors and remove easily for better in-cabinet access. Removable rear panel allows easy access to A\/V components. Precision leveling feet keep the cabinet level even on uneven floors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe clever modular design lets you add extra features to your cabinet. A range of attractive finishes blend nicely with any decor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003eDimensions and Weight Capacity\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Model 237 is 65.75\" wide, 21\" high, and 19.75\" deep. Interior dimensions are 19.75” W x 17.75” H x 18” D (per bay). It has three height-adjustable shelves (one per bay) measuring 19.75\" W x 18.5\" D and a fixed bottom shelf. The height-adjustable shelves are 0.5\" thick. The top platform supports up to 350 lb. The total maximum weight capacity is 1000 lb.  \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Black\/Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45980617932973,"sku":"NEW-SMSB237-BLKALU","price":1999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSB237_BLKALU_01-Large__87079.1705014920.1280.1280_da5bccc8-0830-4ff0-932c-3181aff38ff3.jpg?v=1778144715"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-twin-20-oc-with-double-width-shelf-cherry-aluminum","title":"Salamander Synergy Twin 20 OC with Double-Width Shelf - Cherry\/Aluminum","description":"\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e\u003ci\u003eNote: Image shown with the optional doors and side panels.\n\u003c\/i\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eSupport Your TV and Center Channel Speaker\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander adds new functionality to its best-selling Synergy Twin 20 TV rack with the Twin 20 Center by including a double-width shelf for your center channel speaker. This shelf is 44.5\" wide and 19.75\" deep, with 9 inches of vertical height. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis furniture-quality rack enhances both the appearance and performance of home theater equipment. With its rich wood finish and elegant styling, it looks like a piece of fine furniture. But Salamander's Synergy Twin 20 Center TV stand is a hard worker that provides plenty of space for AV components, with a bottom shelf that accommodates two 17\"-wide components. The top platform will support large TVs, including plasma displays up to 42 inches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Salamander Twin 20 Center TV cabinet is a high-end piece of furniture with a mile-deep hardwood finish and exquisitely clean design. The warmth of the rich hardwood finish seems to radiate throughout the entire room. The quality recalls the finest classic American and European cabinetry. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eAdd Doors and Cabinet Sides\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe modular design of the Twin 20 Center lets you add doors, cabinet sides, and other accessories for extra versatility and design possibilities. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eHolds Lots of Gear\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e The 44.5\"-wide top shelf has space for 32\"-42\" flat panel TVs at the ideal height. The bottom shelf accommodates two standard-width components. The Twin 20 Center includes a removable black rear panel with a wire management feature that keeps cables out of sight and out of the way. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Twin 20 Center is 21\" high, 44.5\" wide, and 19.75\" deep. Adjustable level glide feet are included. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cimg style=\"vertical-align: middle;padding-right: 5px;\" src=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/p65-warning-icon.png\" width=\"25\" height=\"25\" alt=\"warning icon\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-weight:bold;font-size: 14px;\"\u003eWARNING:\u003c\/span\u003e Cancer and Reproductive Harm - \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.p65warnings.ca.gov\/\" title=\"California Proposition 65 link\" target=\"_blank\" style=\"text-decoration: none;color: #2f84eb;\"\u003ewww.P65Warnings.ca.gov\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Cherry \/ Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45980618588333,"sku":"NEW-SMSNC20-CHE-ALU","price":999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMKSNC20_CA__17368.1690893383.1280.1280_201cbc5d-42e6-402d-8094-a25bce50513e.jpg?v=1778116841"},{"product_id":"salamander-designs-synergy-model-237-walnut-aluminum","title":"Salamander Designs Synergy Model 237 - Walnut\/Aluminum","description":"\u003ch3\u003eOne of Salamander's Most Popular AV Cabinets\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy Model 237 is one of the most popular low-boy, triple-door audio\/video cabinets from Salamander Designs. It holds large amount of gear and will accommodate a large sized TV. This cabinet may mounted to the wall by simply removing the feet and attaching the wall mounting accessory. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis cabinet has three side-by-side doors and a generous amount of space for your AV components inside and on the expansive top platform. The 65.75\"-wide top platform accommodates flat panel TVs up to 75\" and weighing up to 350 lbs. The Model 237 is 21\" tall, and its interior shelves hold up to 75 lb. each. The fixed bottom shelf supports up to 350 lb.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003eRock-Solid Framework\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eLike all Salamander Synergy-series cabinets, the Model 237 has a 'smart' aluminum skeleton with wood veneer surfaces and solid wood door frames. This rock-solid framework securely holds an array of high performance features while hiding them from view. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eModel 237 is rich with features. Perforated door inserts permit IR signals, add ventilation, and mask speakers. Snap-on hinges fully extend doors and remove easily for better in-cabinet access. Removable rear panel allows easy access to A\/V components. Precision leveling feet keep the cabinet level even on uneven floors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe clever modular design lets you add extra features to your cabinet. A range of attractive finishes blend nicely with any decor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003eDimensions and Weight Capacity\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Model 237 is 65.75\" wide, 21\" high, and 19.75\" deep. Interior dimensions are 19.75” W x 17.75” H x 18” D (per bay). It has three height-adjustable shelves (one per bay) measuring 19.75\" W x 18.5\" D and a fixed bottom shelf. The height-adjustable shelves are 0.5\" thick. The top platform supports up to 350 lb. The total maximum weight capacity is 1000 lb.  \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Walnut\/Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45980620456109,"sku":"NEW-SMSB237-WALALU","price":1999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSB237_WALALU_02-Large__24100.1705074934.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778112180"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-s3-a-amplifier-stand-walnut","title":"Solidsteel S3-A Amplifier Stand - Walnut","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-sheets-root=\"1\" data-sheets-value=\"{\u0026quot;1\u0026quot;:2,\u0026quot;2\u0026quot;:\u0026quot;Get that big, honking amp off the floor and set it on top of a Solidsteel S3-A Amp Stand. Whether you've got a boat anchor of a mono amp, stereo amp, home theater amp, or some kind of esoteric amp, they all need the solid, performance enhancing support that the S3-A will provide.\u0026quot;}\" data-sheets-userformat='{\"2\":513,\"3\":{\"1\":0},\"12\":0}'\u003eGet that big, honking amp off the floor and set it on top of a Solidsteel S3-A Amp Stand. Whether you've got a boat anchor of a mono amp, stereo amp, home theater amp, or some kind of esoteric amp, they all need the solid, performance enhancing support that the S3-A will provide.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45980627730605,"sku":"NEW-SSS3AW-WAL","price":349.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SS3AW_WAL_01_2023__29430.1720706600.1280.1280_091c9b24-8db1-438d-a955-850270b46b58.jpg?v=1778148235"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-hyperspike-hy-4-four-shelf-audio-rack-black","title":"Solidsteel Hyperspike HY-4 Four-Shelf Audio Rack - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel Hyperspike HY — Separate Shelves That Stack Into a Rack\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThis is not a frame with shelves bolted into it. Each level of an HY is its own shelf on its own four legs, and the rack is those levels stacked one on another, meeting where a polished spike drops into a polished cup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel has built Hyperspike racks in Montesilvano since 2006, and the HY arrived in 2018 as the series that brought the design down from the flagship. Robb Report named it among the audio racks in its 2025 Audio Awards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill It Hold Your Amplifier and Your Sources?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Bottom Bay Is the Tall One\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhichever size you buy, the lowest level has 11.2 inches of clear height where the ones above it have 7.3. That is deliberate: the power amplifier goes at the bottom, where there is room for a big chassis and air above it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Hundred and Fifty-Five Pounds, Every Level\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf takes up to 155 pounds, and the figure does not change from the top platform down to the bottom one. The platforms are 30 millimeters of MDF under an anti-resonance finish, roughly double the thickness most racks use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMeasure Against Twenty Inches, Not the Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe top platform gives the full 23.6 by 19.7 inches of surface. On the levels below it, the legs bring the usable width in to 20 inches while the 19.7 inches of depth stays. Check your widest chassis against that 20-inch figure before anything else.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAdd a Level When the System Grows\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe HY is modular, and a rack gains shelves rather than being replaced. A new level needs an \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/solidsteel-hyperspike-hy-inner-shelf-black-support-posts-not-included\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eHY inner shelf\u003c\/a\u003e and a set of four support posts, which are ordered separately — call us on 800-942-0220 and we will put both on one order for you.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Spike Into a Cup, at Every Level\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration upward and the components themselves add their own. What a rack does about it comes down to how the parts meet, and on an HY the levels touch at four polished points rather than across any flat face.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMechanical Diodes, in the Reviewer’s Words\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach leg ends in a down-facing spike seated in an up-facing cup, both machined and polished stainless steel. Reviewing the HY-4 for StereoNET, Mark Gusew described the spikes as “acting as mechanical diodes” — a one-way path rather than a joint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCone Points and Pins Inside Each Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBeyond the stacking spikes, every shelf carries precision cone point isolation feet to decouple it from the level beneath, plus internal decoupling pins. The isolation is built into each level rather than applied to the rack as a whole.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHeight-Adjustable Spikes at the Floor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe bottom legs adjust for length, so the rack levels on a floor that is not true, and floor-protection discs are included for hardwood or tile. The bottom shelf sits 3.9 inches clear of the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eNothing Closes In Around the Gear\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo back panel, no sides, no doors. Heat leaves a component through its top and its flanks without meeting anything, and the shelves are large enough that there is room around a chassis for air as well as for the cables behind it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tall bottom bay does double duty here. An amplifier that runs hot gets 11.2 inches rather than the 7.3 the upper levels give, so the component most likely to need the air is the one that has it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Shelves, Four Screws Each\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBecause every level is a separate shelf on its own legs, assembly is stacking rather than building. The legs screw into holes already drilled in the boards, and the levels go one on top of another from there.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt ships as several manageable flat packs rather than one heavy carton, which makes getting it into the room much easier than the size suggests. Level the bottom legs before the shelves are loaded.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne care note worth knowing: the lacquered surface is hard-wearing but a heavy component should be lifted onto a shelf rather than dragged across it. Solidsteel’s own unboxing and installation video is embedded below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFunctional Beauty, and Italian\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStainless steel tubes an inch and a half in diameter, machined and polished so they do not hold finger marks, carrying black-lacquered MDF. Solidsteel calls the HY design “Functional Beauty,” and the rack is meant to be seen with equipment on it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is designed and built in Montesilvano, on Italy’s Adriatic coast, by a company that has made nothing but audio supports for three decades. Robb Report picked out its looks as much as its engineering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMark Gusew reviewed the HY-4 for StereoNET. “I came away confident that the Solidsteel rack contributed to my reference system’s overall performance significantly,” he wrote, “and I am sure that many audio manufacturers will agree.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn what it does with vibration he was specific: “Due to its top-class design, and its weight and overall rigidity, there was no discernible colouration from the HY-4.” That held, he added, at high volume and with heavy bass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHe also found the build straightforward, noting that assembly was easier than expected because the rack is effectively four separate shelves stacked on one another, and rated the overall quality as furniture-grade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel’s own unboxing and installation walkthrough of an HY rack, with close-ups of the spike-and-cup joints:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/KdBX1MDYqgA\" title=\"Solidsteel HY Series – Unboxing, Installation \u0026amp; Tips\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel Hyperspike HY Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own a large power amplifier — the bottom bay gives 11.2 inches of clear height and 155 pounds of capacity on every level.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want isolation built into each shelf — spike-into-cup joints between levels, cone point feet and internal decoupling pins, not one welded frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou would rather not wrestle a giant carton — it arrives as separate flat packs and assembles by stacking finished shelves.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour system will grow — add a level with an \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/solidsteel-hyperspike-hy-inner-shelf-black-support-posts-not-included\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eHY inner shelf\u003c\/a\u003e and a set of posts, and the rack you own becomes the next size up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want to go further under a source — the platforms are neutral enough that \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e on top of them do their own work cleanly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/solidsteel-hyperspike-hy-inner-shelf-black-support-posts-not-included\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eHY inner shelf\u003c\/a\u003e — the same platform used in every HY rack, for adding a level; support posts are ordered separately.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — Mark Gusew put constrained-layer pucks under his components on this rack and got exactly what he expected.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is the widest surface and has nothing above it, which is where a deck belongs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — plan your runs around which component sits in the tall bottom bay, since that is where the amplifier goes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA maximum of 155 pounds, which is 70 kilograms, and it applies to every level including the top. Each platform is 30 millimeters of MDF and weighs around 33 pounds on its own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my power amplifier fit on the bottom shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe bottom bay has 11.2 inches of clear height against 7.3 inches for the levels above it, and it is sized for exactly that. Measure your chassis width against the 20 inches usable between the legs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStraightforward. Each level is a finished shelf whose four legs screw into pre-drilled holes, and the rack is those levels stacked. It arrives as several manageable boxes rather than one heavy carton.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. A level takes an HY inner shelf plus a set of four support posts, which are separate items. Call us on 800-942-0220 before ordering and we will make sure both are on the order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat does the spike-and-cup design do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach leg ends in a polished spike that seats into a polished cup on the level below, so the levels meet at four points rather than across flat faces. Every shelf also carries cone point feet and internal decoupling pins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it mark my floor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFloor-protection discs are included for the height-adjustable spikes, which is what you want on hardwood or tile. The bottom legs adjust so the rack can be leveled on a floor that is not quite true.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45980635988141,"sku":"NEW-SSHY4-BLK","price":2999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSHY4_BLK_01_2024__97643.1707873770.1280.1280_9a95f5ca-60b5-4248-8685-3d451d14222d.jpg?v=1778149790"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-hyperspike-hy-3-three-shelf-audio-rack-black","title":"Solidsteel Hyperspike HY-3 Three-Shelf Audio Rack - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel Hyperspike HY — Separate Shelves That Stack Into a Rack\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThis is not a frame with shelves bolted into it. Each level of an HY is its own shelf on its own four legs, and the rack is those levels stacked one on another, meeting where a polished spike drops into a polished cup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel has built Hyperspike racks in Montesilvano since 2006, and the HY arrived in 2018 as the series that brought the design down from the flagship. Robb Report named it among the audio racks in its 2025 Audio Awards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill It Hold Your Amplifier and Your Sources?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Bottom Bay Is the Tall One\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhichever size you buy, the lowest level has 11.2 inches of clear height where the ones above it have 7.3. That is deliberate: the power amplifier goes at the bottom, where there is room for a big chassis and air above it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Hundred and Fifty-Five Pounds, Every Level\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf takes up to 155 pounds, and the figure does not change from the top platform down to the bottom one. The platforms are 30 millimeters of MDF under an anti-resonance finish, roughly double the thickness most racks use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMeasure Against Twenty Inches, Not the Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe top platform gives the full 23.6 by 19.7 inches of surface. On the levels below it, the legs bring the usable width in to 20 inches while the 19.7 inches of depth stays. Check your widest chassis against that 20-inch figure before anything else.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAdd a Level When the System Grows\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe HY is modular, and a rack gains shelves rather than being replaced. A new level needs an \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/solidsteel-hyperspike-hy-inner-shelf-black-support-posts-not-included\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eHY inner shelf\u003c\/a\u003e and a set of four support posts, which are ordered separately — call us on 800-942-0220 and we will put both on one order for you.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Spike Into a Cup, at Every Level\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration upward and the components themselves add their own. What a rack does about it comes down to how the parts meet, and on an HY the levels touch at four polished points rather than across any flat face.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMechanical Diodes, in the Reviewer’s Words\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach leg ends in a down-facing spike seated in an up-facing cup, both machined and polished stainless steel. Reviewing the HY-4 for StereoNET, Mark Gusew described the spikes as “acting as mechanical diodes” — a one-way path rather than a joint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCone Points and Pins Inside Each Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBeyond the stacking spikes, every shelf carries precision cone point isolation feet to decouple it from the level beneath, plus internal decoupling pins. The isolation is built into each level rather than applied to the rack as a whole.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHeight-Adjustable Spikes at the Floor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe bottom legs adjust for length, so the rack levels on a floor that is not true, and floor-protection discs are included for hardwood or tile. The bottom shelf sits 3.9 inches clear of the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eNothing Closes In Around the Gear\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo back panel, no sides, no doors. Heat leaves a component through its top and its flanks without meeting anything, and the shelves are large enough that there is room around a chassis for air as well as for the cables behind it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tall bottom bay does double duty here. An amplifier that runs hot gets 11.2 inches rather than the 7.3 the upper levels give, so the component most likely to need the air is the one that has it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Shelves, Four Screws Each\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBecause every level is a separate shelf on its own legs, assembly is stacking rather than building. The legs screw into holes already drilled in the boards, and the levels go one on top of another from there.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt ships as several manageable flat packs rather than one heavy carton, which makes getting it into the room much easier than the size suggests. Level the bottom legs before the shelves are loaded.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne care note worth knowing: the lacquered surface is hard-wearing but a heavy component should be lifted onto a shelf rather than dragged across it. Solidsteel’s own unboxing and installation video is embedded below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFunctional Beauty, and Italian\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStainless steel tubes an inch and a half in diameter, machined and polished so they do not hold finger marks, carrying black-lacquered MDF. Solidsteel calls the HY design “Functional Beauty,” and the rack is meant to be seen with equipment on it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is designed and built in Montesilvano, on Italy’s Adriatic coast, by a company that has made nothing but audio supports for three decades. Robb Report picked out its looks as much as its engineering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMark Gusew reviewed the HY-4 for StereoNET. “I came away confident that the Solidsteel rack contributed to my reference system’s overall performance significantly,” he wrote, “and I am sure that many audio manufacturers will agree.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn what it does with vibration he was specific: “Due to its top-class design, and its weight and overall rigidity, there was no discernible colouration from the HY-4.” That held, he added, at high volume and with heavy bass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHe also found the build straightforward, noting that assembly was easier than expected because the rack is effectively four separate shelves stacked on one another, and rated the overall quality as furniture-grade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel’s own unboxing and installation walkthrough of an HY rack, with close-ups of the spike-and-cup joints:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/KdBX1MDYqgA\" title=\"Solidsteel HY Series – Unboxing, Installation \u0026amp; Tips\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel Hyperspike HY Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own a large power amplifier — the bottom bay gives 11.2 inches of clear height and 155 pounds of capacity on every level.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want isolation built into each shelf — spike-into-cup joints between levels, cone point feet and internal decoupling pins, not one welded frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou would rather not wrestle a giant carton — it arrives as separate flat packs and assembles by stacking finished shelves.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour system will grow — add a level with an \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/solidsteel-hyperspike-hy-inner-shelf-black-support-posts-not-included\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eHY inner shelf\u003c\/a\u003e and a set of posts, and the rack you own becomes the next size up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want to go further under a source — the platforms are neutral enough that \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e on top of them do their own work cleanly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/solidsteel-hyperspike-hy-inner-shelf-black-support-posts-not-included\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eHY inner shelf\u003c\/a\u003e — the same platform used in every HY rack, for adding a level; support posts are ordered separately.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — Mark Gusew put constrained-layer pucks under his components on this rack and got exactly what he expected.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is the widest surface and has nothing above it, which is where a deck belongs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — plan your runs around which component sits in the tall bottom bay, since that is where the amplifier goes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA maximum of 155 pounds, which is 70 kilograms, and it applies to every level including the top. Each platform is 30 millimeters of MDF and weighs around 33 pounds on its own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my power amplifier fit on the bottom shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe bottom bay has 11.2 inches of clear height against 7.3 inches for the levels above it, and it is sized for exactly that. Measure your chassis width against the 20 inches usable between the legs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStraightforward. Each level is a finished shelf whose four legs screw into pre-drilled holes, and the rack is those levels stacked. It arrives as several manageable boxes rather than one heavy carton.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. A level takes an HY inner shelf plus a set of four support posts, which are separate items. Call us on 800-942-0220 before ordering and we will make sure both are on the order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat does the spike-and-cup design do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach leg ends in a polished spike that seats into a polished cup on the level below, so the levels meet at four points rather than across flat faces. Every shelf also carries cone point feet and internal decoupling pins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it mark my floor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFloor-protection discs are included for the height-adjustable spikes, which is what you want on hardwood or tile. The bottom legs adjust so the rack can be leveled on a floor that is not quite true.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981159817389,"sku":"NEW-SSHY3-BLK","price":2399.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSHY3_BLK_01_2024__74358.1707873399.1280.1280_a7efa625-310f-454b-9918-7ec00f6207b8.jpg?v=1778149778"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-vl-4-four-shelf-vinyl-library-and-audio-rack-walnut","title":"Solidsteel VL-4 Four-Shelf Vinyl Library and Audio Rack - Walnut","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel VL — Fifty Inches Wide, With the Records Built In\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlmost every audio rack is a tower. The VL is not. It runs 50.4 inches across and 16.1 deep, with every shelf divided into two bays side by side, and the bottom pair given over to records rather than electronics.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat shape changes what the rack can do. Gear spreads out instead of stacking up, the collection sits at the same height as the turntable that plays it, and the whole thing stays low enough to see over.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Will a Fifty-Inch Shelf Hold?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Hundred and Sixty Pounds on Every Level\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf is rated at 264.5 pounds, which is 120 kilograms, and Solidsteel tests to that figure. It applies to the top platform and to every shelf below it, so nothing about what you own has to determine where it sits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Bays Side by Side, Not One Long Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach level is split into two usable spaces of 18.9 inches wide. That is the figure to measure your components against, not the 50.4 inches of overall width — a single very wide chassis will not span the divide, but two normal ones sit happily beside each other.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Bottom Bay Is Always the Record Bay\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhichever size you choose, the lowest level is the vinyl shelf and it has 12.8 inches of clear height, which takes a twelve-inch sleeve standing upright with room above it. The gaps between the shelves above are 8.8 inches, sized for components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Top Shelf Takes the Deck and One More Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAt 50.4 inches across, the top platform has room for a turntable and something else beside it — a phono stage, an integrated amplifier, a streamer. On a tower rack that second box would have to go on a different level entirely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes Inside the Frame, Not Just Underneath It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration upward and speakers put more of it into the room. What a rack does with that depends on its materials and on how the parts meet each other, and Solidsteel works on both.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFilled Aluminum, Borrowed From the S Series\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe support posts are anodized aluminum filled with a sound-absorbing material, which is the same construction as Solidsteel’s S Series component racks. A hollow tube rings when something excites it; a filled one has far less to give back.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eInner Spikes Where the Parts Meet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe frame hardware uses spikes internally, so the joints between post and shelf meet at points rather than across flat faces. Outside, adjustable stainless steel spike feet couple the rack to the floor and level it, with protective discs included for hard floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Full Record Bay Makes It Steadier\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTwo hundred records weigh close to a hundred pounds, and on this rack all of that sits in the lowest bay. Reviewing the three-shelf VL, StereoNET’s Jay Garrett found that the loaded bottom shelf improved how firmly the rack coupled to the floor through its spikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eOpen Front and Back, So Cables Reach\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThere is no back panel, no side panel and no door anywhere on the VL. Warm air leaves a component through its top and its flanks without meeting anything, which is the one thing a closed cabinet cannot offer whatever is cut into it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe open back matters just as much for what plugs in. Tonearm leads, a ground wire and power cords all have to get somewhere, and a rack this wide would be very awkward to live with if you had to reach around it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eBuild It Upside Down\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat is the trick, and it comes from someone who has built one. Start with the top shelf face down and work up from there, and the rack assembles far more easily than trying to hold shelves level while you thread posts underneath them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLay the parts out first and check them against the sheet before you start. Some of the bolts have different thread depths at each end, so a methodical five minutes at the beginning saves backtracking later.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne practical note: the shelves are 50 inches long and the carton is heavy. Getting the box to the room where the rack will live is a two-person job, and it is worth clearing the floor around it before you open anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere the Record Collection Actually Lives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAround two hundred LPs fit in the bottom bay, split between its two sections and standing upright with their spines facing out. That is a collection you read across rather than one you dig through, sitting directly below the deck that plays it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel builds the VL to be added to. A rack can gain levels as a system grows, so a smaller one becomes a larger one rather than being replaced when the collection outgrows it. Call us on 800-942-0220 about expansion parts before you place an order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLow and Wide, Not Tall and Narrow\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAt 16.1 inches deep and wider than most sideboards, the VL reads as furniture rather than as equipment. Black or walnut shelves in polymeric laminate over 0.9-inch MDF, on a black frame, and the spines of the records become part of how it looks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is built in Italy, and the metal parts that are not aluminum are galvanized and then powder-coated against rust. This is a rack meant for a room people actually sit in, which is exactly where a record collection belongs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJay Garrett reviewed the three-shelf VL for StereoNET and gave it an Applause Award. It is “a definite contender for those looking to house their hi-fi and records together, as few purpose-designed hi-fi racks offer this,” he wrote.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn build, he found it “a sure improvement over standard flatpack furniture, as it’s been designed with audio in mind,” and reckoned the shelf takes more records than the published figure suggests.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel’s official installation guide for the VL series, worth watching before you open the carton:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/rN0JXWfeWzs\" title=\"Solidsteel VL Series – Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAnd an unboxing and build of a VL, walked through by Solidsteel’s own team:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/795Ep4YDMLM\" title=\"Live Box | VL Series | Unboxing \u0026amp; Installation\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel VL Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want the records beside the deck, not across the room — the bottom bay holds around 200 LPs directly under the turntable that plays them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou have wall space rather than height — 50.4 inches wide and 16.1 deep, low enough to sit under a window or a wall-mounted screen.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own heavy components — 264.5 pounds per shelf, tested, and the same figure on every level from top to bottom.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want two boxes on the top platform — the deck and a phono stage or amplifier fit side by side rather than on separate levels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want the deck steadier still — the posts are filled and spiked already, and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e under the turntable take it further.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform carries the deck and a second component beside it, with the records one level down.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — between a source and its shelf, for the one component that deserves more than the rack alone.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — a rack 50 inches wide spreads components further apart, so work your runs out from the layout you intend.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA phono stage\u003c\/a\u003e — there is room for one next to the deck on the top shelf, which is the shortest cartridge lead you can give it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many records will it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAround two hundred twelve-inch LPs in the bottom bay, divided between its two sections. The bay has 12.8 inches of clear height, so sleeves stand upright with room to get a hand in above them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e264.5 pounds, which is 120 kilograms, and Solidsteel tests each shelf to that figure. It is per shelf rather than shared, and it is the same on the top platform as on the bottom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill two components fit side by side?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat is what the rack is for. Each level is divided into two usable bays of 18.9 inches wide, so measure your chassis against that figure rather than against the 50.4 inches of overall width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is a bolt-together job with a single-sheet guide and an official video. Build it upside down starting from the top shelf, lay the hardware out first, and allow for two people to move the carton into the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel designs the VL series to be expanded, so a rack can gain levels as a system grows. Call us on 800-942-0220 before you order and we will confirm what is available for the size you are buying.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the difference between the black and walnut versions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe shelf laminate. Both run on the same black aluminum frame with the same hardware, the same capacity and the same dimensions, so the choice is about the room rather than about the rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981174169773,"sku":"NEW-SSVL4W-WAL","price":1599.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSVL4W_WAL_01_2023__76807.1704305311.1280.1280_dd58ed0d-cd95-4629-a221-99bd6ae3be66.jpg?v=1778148952"},{"product_id":"pangea-audio-turntable-stand-with-vinyl-record-storage-carbon-fiber","title":"Pangea Audio Turntable Stand with Vinyl Record Storage - Carbon Fiber","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Pangea Audio Vulcan TT — Deck on Top, Electronics in the Middle, Records Below\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThree shelves, three different jobs. A thick platform on top for the turntable, an ordinary shelf under it for whatever drives the deck, and a braced bottom shelf holding a hundred records upright. One piece of furniture instead of three.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt stands 27.5 inches tall, which is the number that matters more than it sounds. That is cueing height — you drop a needle or flip a side without stooping over the deck or reaching up to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Goes on It, Level by Level\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy the Top Platform Is Thicker Than the Rest\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe turntable shelf is 19 millimeters of MDF where the two below it are 0.625 inches. A heavier platform resists being set moving by whatever reaches it, and a deck is the one component on any rack that cannot tolerate being moved while it works.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe surface is 23.75 inches wide and 18 deep, which takes a full-size plinth and leaves the dust cover room to hinge. Nothing sits above it, so the cover opens through its whole arc.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Middle Shelf for Whatever Drives the Deck\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThere are 7.25 inches of clear height between the middle shelf and the platform above it, which suits a phono stage, a small integrated amplifier or a streamer. Check yours against the 19.4 inches clear between the side supports rather than the shelf width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Hundred Records on the Bottom\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe lowest shelf is built for vinyl and sits 13.1 inches below the middle one, so a twelve-inch sleeve stands upright with room to get your fingers in above it. It takes more than a hundred records, spines out.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIt Works as a Component Rack Too\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNothing obliges you to put a turntable on it. Milton Clark at HDTVs and More uses his as an amplifier stand, with a five-channel power amplifier on the middle shelf and a 75-pound Rotel on the bottom where the records would go.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy a Full Bottom Shelf Is a Good Thing\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA hundred records weigh about fifty pounds and all of it sits near the floor. Weight that low drops the center of gravity and makes the whole stand harder for anything in the room to disturb, which is the opposite of how most furniture behaves as you fill it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Braces Tighten as the Records Go In\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSteel X-braces frame the bottom shelf. A rectangle of posts can lean; a braced one cannot, because the shape would have to change length first. Pangea builds these to come under tension as the load goes on, so a full stand is a stiffer stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes Find the Floor Through the Carpet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTapered cone feet with carpet-piercing spikes reach past the pile to the floor underneath and level the stand on boards that are never quite true. Four Mini Sonic Saucers are included so the same spikes can stand on wood or tile without marking it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAn Amplifier Can Breathe in Here\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThere is no back panel, no side panel and no door anywhere on this stand. An integrated amplifier on the middle shelf sheds its heat upward and sideways into open air, which is the one thing a closed cabinet can never offer however well someone has ventilated it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe open back earns its keep in another way. A tonearm cable, a ground wire and a power lead all have to reach somewhere, and that is a far easier job when there is nothing behind the deck but air.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYou Will Not Need the Toolbox\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo screwdriver and no wrench are required. Bolts hide inside the steel posts, and the posts twist together by hand to clamp each shelf as they tighten. Fifteen minutes is the usual figure, and it does not loosen off over the year that follows.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLevel it on the spikes while the shelves are still empty. Fifty pounds of vinyl and a turntable make a stand very hard to tilt, and reaching a foot underneath a loaded one is a job you will only want to do once.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eRecords Where You Can Actually Reach Them\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eStoring records upright with the spines showing is the difference between a collection you browse and a stack you excavate. Flat piles hide everything under the top sleeve, and the record you want is always near the bottom of one.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHere they sit at floor level beside the deck, so choosing the next side and putting the last one away happen without getting out of the chair. If the collection outgrows one shelf, an \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/pangea-audio-vulcan-turntable-stand-add-on-lp-storage-shelf\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eadd-on LP storage shelf\u003c\/a\u003e arrives complete with its posts and braces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAt 27.5 Inches, It Sits Where You Want It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat is roughly the height of a small chest of drawers — low enough to sit beside a chair or between the speakers without blocking either. Black, Carbon Fiber, Espresso and Rosenut, each one a vinyl wrap over dense MDF that shrugs off scuffs and wipes clean.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMilton Clark at HDTVs and More runs his as an amplifier rack rather than a turntable stand, loaded with a five-channel amp and a 75-pound Rotel. “The stand is impressively well-built,” he wrote, and it “handles it with ease.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMilton Clark’s walkthrough of the same stand, shelf by shelf:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/_Lg1Wt2UAmc\" title=\"Pangea Audio Vulcan TT Turntable Stand Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Pangea Audio Vulcan TT Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want the deck, the electronics and the records in one place — three shelves, each built for a different one of those jobs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou are tired of stooping to cue a record — at 27.5 inches the platform sits at the height your hands already expect.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own a heavy amplifier — a reviewer runs a 75-pound Rotel on the bottom shelf of his, with a five-channel amp above it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour collection keeps growing — an \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/pangea-audio-vulcan-turntable-stand-add-on-lp-storage-shelf\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eadd-on LP storage shelf\u003c\/a\u003e arrives complete with posts and braces in the finish you already own.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want the deck steadier still — the platform is the thickest shelf on the stand, and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e underneath the turntable take it further.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/pangea-audio-vulcan-turntable-stand-add-on-lp-storage-shelf\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAdd-on LP storage shelf\u003c\/a\u003e — one kit holds the shelf, its four posts and a pair of steel braces, adding another hundred records of space.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eVulcan component shelves and posts\u003c\/a\u003e — for a second electronics level, or taller posts where something needs more clear height.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — slide a set between the turntable and the top platform when the deck deserves more than the stand alone.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the platform takes a full-size plinth with the dust cover clear, so the choice is about the deck rather than the shelf.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many records will it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMore than a hundred twelve-inch LPs on the bottom shelf, standing upright with their spines out. There are 13.1 inches above that shelf, so a sleeve stands clear with room to get a hand in over the top of it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my turntable fit on the top platform?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe surface is 23.75 inches wide and 18 inches deep with nothing above it, which takes a full-size plinth and lets the dust cover open fully. Measure your widest point against the 19.4 inches clear between the side supports.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I use it without a turntable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003ePlenty of owners do. The top platform is the thickest shelf on the stand, so it suits a heavy component just as well, and the bottom shelf takes electronics instead of records if that is what you need from it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add more storage later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The add-on LP storage shelf comes as one kit with its posts and braces, in all four finishes, and a standard Vulcan component shelf fits the same frame. Pangea recommends keeping the finished stack under 42 inches tall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo tools are needed. The steel posts twist together by hand and clamp each shelf as you tighten them, which takes about fifteen minutes. Every piece of hardware is in the box, floor saucers included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the warranty?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTwo years. If anything is wrong with the stand when it arrives, call us on 800-942-0220 and we will deal with it rather than pointing you at a form.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Pangea Audio","offers":[{"title":"Carbon Fiber","offer_id":45981193732269,"sku":"NEW-PGVTTX-CAR-BLK","price":249.95,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/PGVTTX_CAR_01_2024__56024.1706194484.1280.1280_71ebda01-a0dd-47c9-937a-859ff20f3dd1.jpg?v=1778105029"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-triple-30-oc-with-triple-width-shelf-walnut-alumium","title":"Salamander Synergy Triple 30 OC  with Triple-Width Shelf - Walnut\/Alumium","description":"\u003ci\u003eShown with optional perforated steel doors and solid wood side panels.\u003c\/i\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSupport for Large TVs and Center Speakers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander adds new functionality to its best-selling Synergy Triple 30 TV rack with the Triple 30 Center by including a triple-width shelf for your center channel speaker. The generous-size shelf is a full 65.75\" wide and 19.75\" deep, with 8.25 inches of vertical height. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis furniture-quality rack enhances both the appearance and performance of home theater equipment. With its rich wood finish and elegant styling, it looks like a piece of fine furniture. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eBut Salamander's Synergy Triple 30 Center TV stand is a hard worker that provides plenty of space for AV components, including six internal shelves that accommodates as many as six 17\"-wide components. The top platform will support large TVs, including plasma displays up to 60 inches - and most direct view or table-top sets! \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Salamander Triple 30 Center TV cabinet is a high-end piece of furniture with a mile-deep hardwood finish and exquisitely clean design. The warmth of the rich hardwood finish seems to radiate throughout the entire room. The quality recalls the finest classic American and European cabinetry. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003eAdd Doors and Cabinet Sides\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe modular design of the Triple 30 Center lets you add doors, cabinet sides, and other accessories for extra versatility and design possibilities. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eHolds Lots of Gear\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe 66.75\"-wide and 19.75\"-deep top platform will accommodate most big-screen TVs and monitors. The Triple 30 Center includes a removable black rear panel with a wire management feature that keeps cables out of sight and out of the way. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Triple 30 Center is 31\" high, 66.75\" wide, and 19.75\" deep. Adjustable level glide feet are included. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cimg style=\"vertical-align: middle;padding-right: 5px;\" src=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/p65-warning-icon.png\" width=\"25\" height=\"25\" alt=\"warning icon\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-weight:bold;font-size: 14px;\"\u003eWARNING:\u003c\/span\u003e Cancer and Reproductive Harm - \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.p65warnings.ca.gov\/\" title=\"California Proposition 65 link\" target=\"_blank\" style=\"text-decoration: none;color: #2f84eb;\"\u003ewww.P65Warnings.ca.gov\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"New \/ Walnut \/ Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45981203562669,"sku":"NEW-SMSLC30-WAL-ALU","price":1899.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSLC30WA_S__34729.1689623319.1280.1280_db9a9c9e-8462-4525-8d9a-970ddb48503e.jpg?v=1778116889"},{"product_id":"salamander-designs-archetype-2-0-two-shelf-audio-rack-black","title":"Salamander Designs Archetype 2.0 Two-Shelf Audio Rack - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Salamander Archetype — Shelves That Go Exactly Where You Want Them\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMost racks decide the spacing for you. Four threaded steel rods run the height of an Archetype, and every shelf is held between nuts and washers that you can put anywhere along them. There are no notches, no pegs and no fixed positions to design your system around.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSalamander has built it this way since the company started, and the idea has outlasted several generations of the equipment it holds. A rack whose shelves move is a rack you can keep when the components change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Will It Hold, and Where?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Hundred and Fifty Pounds Per Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat is the figure for every shelf on every Archetype, and it is a long way beyond what most racks in this class manage. A heavy power amplifier is not a problem to be solved here, and there is no bottom-shelf-only rule to work around.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePut the Shelves Where Your Gear Needs Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpacing is set by where you tighten the nuts, so it is continuous rather than stepped. A tall tube amplifier and a slim streamer can sit on the same rack with completely different clearances, decided by what you own rather than by where a notch happened to fall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMeasure Against 19.25 Inches, Not the Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf is 23 inches wide and 16 deep in three-quarter-inch wood, but the usable figure is the 19.25 inches of clear space between the steel rods. That is what your widest component has to pass, so start there when you are checking whether something fits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Different Ways to Make It Bigger\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA single shelf adds a level inside the rack you already own, threading onto the same rods. The other route is the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-stacking-kit-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype Stacking Kit\u003c\/a\u003e — four coupling nuts that join two complete racks into one taller one. Those are different jobs, so order by what you actually want.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Rubber Washers Are the Point\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration and every component on a rack puts some of its own into the frame. What matters is whether that travels on to the next shelf, and on an Archetype the answer is designed rather than accidental.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eNeoprene Above and Below Every Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf is clamped between steel nuts and washers, with energy-damping neoprene washers sitting between the hardware and the wood on both faces. Nothing rigid touches the shelf itself, so the steel rods are not a direct path from one component to the next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eChoose What Meets the Floor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe rack stands on its own feet as it comes, and what happens underneath is up to you. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-mega-spikes-set-of-4-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMega Spikes\u003c\/a\u003e couple it through carpet to the floor below; casters let you roll the whole thing out to reach the back of everything.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eGive the Hot Box the Gap It Needs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAn open frame with no back panel, no sides and no doors lets air move freely past every face of a component. That is a property of the design itself, and no closed cabinet can offer it however many vents have been cut into the panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable spacing matters more here than on most racks. A class-A amplifier that runs warm can be given several inches of clear air above it while a slim source takes the minimum, instead of every component getting an identical gap.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Building It Actually Involves\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour rods, and a stack of nuts and washers for each shelf. You thread the hardware on, slide a shelf down to where you want it, and tighten from both sides. Work out your spacing before you start and the job goes in one pass rather than two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet the height of every shelf while the rack is empty, with a tape measure and the tallest component beside you. The same hardware that makes the spacing adjustable is what you would otherwise be loosening later with gear in your way.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eReal Wood, and Black Steel Through It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack, Cherry and Walnut, in real wood rather than a printed wrap, which is why the grain differs from shelf to shelf. The threaded rods and hardware are black on every finish — a deliberate constant, so the frame reads the same whichever wood you choose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eShelves are three-quarters of an inch thick and carry their own weight visually as well as structurally. This is the line to pick when the rack has to sit in a room with furniture in it rather than in a dedicated listening space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHome Theater Review put the five-shelf Archetype through a full write-up. “These are high-quality racks that offer more than their price point would lead you to believe,” the reviewer concluded, calling the shelving “infinitely adjustable.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWriting in August 2008, the same reviewer called it “an affordable and completely flexible system that will proudly hold the finest of AV gear in style” — and the rack has not changed since.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA full build of an Archetype from the box up, which is worth watching once before you plan your shelf heights:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/142p7kzgWsw\" title=\"How to Build the Salamander Archetype\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAnd Salamander’s own walkthrough of the system and what can be added to it:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/7fgLcBrh2_Q\" title=\"Salamander rAVe Podcast – Archetype\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Salamander Archetype Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own something genuinely heavy — 150 pounds per shelf is the figure on every level, so the big amplifier goes wherever you want it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour components are different heights — shelf spacing is continuous rather than stepped, so each one gets the clearance it actually needs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want real wood in the room — Black, Cherry and Walnut in solid finishes, sized to sit among furniture rather than dominate it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour system will change — add a single shelf inside the rack, or join two racks with the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-stacking-kit-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eStacking Kit\u003c\/a\u003e when one is no longer enough.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want to reach behind everything — an \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-drawer-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype drawer\u003c\/a\u003e for accessories and casters underneath make the back of the system reachable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype single shelves\u003c\/a\u003e — a shelf and its hardware, threading onto the rods you already have, in the finish to match.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-stacking-kit-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype Stacking Kit\u003c\/a\u003e — four coupling nuts that join two racks into one taller unit when adding a shelf is no longer enough.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — between a component and its shelf, where a source deserves more than the rack alone provides.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — work out your runs after you have set the shelf heights, since the spacing is yours to decide.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA hundred and fifty pounds, per shelf rather than shared across the rack, and the same on every level. The shelf itself is three-quarters of an inch of wood on 5\/8-inch threaded steel rods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my tall amplifier fit between the shelves?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlmost certainly, because you decide the gap. The shelves clamp anywhere along the rods, so measure your tallest component and set the spacing to suit it. Check its width against the 19.25 inches clear between the rods too.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, in two different ways. A single shelf threads onto the rods you already have to add a level inside the rack. The Stacking Kit instead joins two complete racks together, which is the route to take when one rack is full.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is a nuts-and-washers job rather than a snap-together one, and that is the trade for spacing you set yourself. Decide your shelf heights first, with the components measured, and the whole rack goes together in a single pass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the wood real?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The shelves are real wood rather than a printed vinyl wrap, so grain and tone vary a little between shelves and between racks. The threaded rods and hardware are black across every finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat can I add to it later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSingle shelves, the Stacking Kit, a storage drawer, arched bookends, spike feet and two grades of caster. The system was designed to be added to, and the parts still fit racks built many years ago.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:1.6em 0 0 0;font-size:0.9em;\"\u003e\n\u003cimg style=\"vertical-align: middle;padding-right: 5px;\" src=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/p65-warning-icon.png\" width=\"25\" height=\"25\" alt=\"warning icon\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-weight:bold;font-size: 14px;\"\u003eWARNING:\u003c\/span\u003e Cancer and Reproductive Harm - \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.p65warnings.ca.gov\/\" title=\"California Proposition 65 link\" target=\"_blank\" style=\"text-decoration: none;color: #2f84eb;\"\u003ewww.P65Warnings.ca.gov\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Black","offer_id":45981208117421,"sku":"NEW-SMA2-BLK","price":299.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMA2_BLK_01-Large__91371.1713882693.1280.1280_2a6206d6-7b45-4226-bd3d-688e832f6597.jpg?v=1778137675"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-s2-3-three-shelf-audio-rack-black","title":"Solidsteel S2-3 Three-Shelf Audio Rack - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel S2 — Aluminum Pillars With No Welds in Them\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA welded joint is a place where energy gathers, and a hollow welded post will ring because of it. Solidsteel builds the S2’s pillars from aluminum without welding them, which takes that path away rather than damping it afterwards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAluminum is the other half of the choice. It is light, it is strong, it is non-magnetic, and it absorbs energy on its own account. The result is a compact Italian rack built on the same thinking as Solidsteel’s larger ones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Goes on It, and What Will Not\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Hundred and Ten Pounds on Any Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery level takes up to 110 pounds, top platform included. That covers an integrated amplifier, a big disc player or a heavy turntable without thinking about it, and there is no weak level to plan around.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCheck Your Tallest Box Against 8.6 Inches\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe clear height between shelves is 8.6 inches. Most amplifiers, streamers and players fit comfortably, but a tall tube amplifier or a large power amplifier may not, so this is the measurement to take before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Top Platform Is the Wide One\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe top shelf gives the full 23 inches of width. The levels below it come in to 19.7 inches between the pillars, and all of them are 16.9 inches deep. Anything unusually wide belongs on top, where nothing is in the way.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePick the Height That Suits the Room\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe three-shelf rack stands 23.2 inches tall, which puts a turntable at a comfortable working height beside a chair. The taller versions go up from there on the same 23 by 16.9-inch footprint, so the floor space does not change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy a Post With No Weld Stays Quiet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eVibration reaches your components from the floor underneath and from the speakers in the room. A turntable feels it most, but an amplifier or a disc player is affected too, and what the rack is made of decides how much arrives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMassive Shelves That Will Not Resonate\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf is 0.86 inches of dense MDF, chosen because fiberboard of that thickness absorbs energy instead of passing it on. The shelves are heavy enough that they do not easily resonate against the pillars holding them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes Into the Floor, Discs on Top of It\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spike feet drain mechanical energy into the floor and let you level the rack on a surface that is not true. Protective floor discs are supplied for hardwood, tile, laminate or vinyl.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eOpen on Every Side\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThere is no back panel, no side panel and no door. Heat leaves a component through its top and its flanks into open air, and the cables behind everything stay reachable without moving the rack away from the wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat matters more on a compact rack than on a large one, because the components sit closer together. An open frame is what stops a small rack becoming a warm box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eBuild It Where It Will Live\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe rack assembles from shelves and pillars, so allow a little floor space and a little time. Build it in the room it is going to occupy rather than carrying a finished rack through a doorway.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFit the spikes into the underside of the bottom shelf first. On carpet let them reach through to the subfloor; on a hard surface use the discs. Adjust each one until the rack sits level and does not rock, then load the heaviest component low.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eItalian, and Deliberately Plain\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack shelves on aluminum pillars, with clean lines and nothing decorative anywhere. The S2 is designed in Italy to sit in an ordinary room rather than a dedicated one, which is exactly what a second system usually needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel’s official installation guide for the S2 series, worth watching once before you start:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/M4w__8qGAeM\" title=\"Solidsteel S2 Series – Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel S2 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou are building a second system — a bedroom, den or office setup that deserves proper support on a 23 by 16.9-inch footprint.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own a turntable — the three-shelf rack puts the platter at a comfortable working height and the top shelf has nothing above it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want the engineering, not the bulk — non-welded aluminum pillars and 0.86-inch shelves, in the smallest rack Solidsteel builds.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour components are normal sizes — 8.6 inches of clear height and 110 pounds a shelf covers most amplifiers, players and streamers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want to take it further — the shelves are a clean starting point for \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e under a source component.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is the widest surface on the rack and the one with nothing above it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — between a component and its shelf, where one source deserves more than the rack alone.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — work out your runs from where each box will actually sit, since the levels are close together.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA phono stage\u003c\/a\u003e — small enough for any level, and it keeps the cartridge lead short if it sits near the deck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eUp to 110 pounds per shelf, and the figure is the same on every level including the top. The shelves themselves are 0.86 inches of dense MDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my amplifier fit between the shelves?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe clear height is 8.6 inches. Most integrated amplifiers, players and streamers fit easily, but measure a tall tube amplifier or a large power amplifier first, since those are the ones that will not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat makes the pillars different?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThey are aluminum rather than steel, and they are not welded. A weld in a hollow post gives energy somewhere to collect and ring, so building without one removes the path instead of treating it afterwards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt goes together from shelves and pillars with the hardware supplied, and Solidsteel publishes a step-by-step guide which is embedded above. Build it in the room where it will stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it damage my floor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eProtective discs are included for the spike feet and work on hardwood, tile, laminate or vinyl. On carpet the spikes can go through to the subfloor, which is what you want for stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the difference between the sizes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe number of shelves and the height, on the same 23 by 16.9-inch footprint. Clear height between levels, shelf capacity and construction are identical across the range.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981208346797,"sku":"NEW-SSS2-3-BLK","price":479.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSS2_3_01_2023__72006.1704740732.1280.1280_1426f18e-9636-4118-a9df-af966e500483.jpg?v=1778148821"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-hyperspike-hf-2-two-shelf-audio-rack-gloss-white","title":"Solidsteel Hyperspike HF-2 Two-Shelf Audio Rack - Gloss White","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel Hyperspike HF — Where Every Upright Ends in a Spike\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMost racks bolt their shelves to a frame. On a Hyperspike the uprights carrying each platform end in a point, and that point sits in a dimple in the upright below it. The rack is a stack of separate levels meeting at contact points rather than one welded structure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat idea is what the range is named after, and it is carried through to the floor, where four large spikes do the same job between the rack and your room. This is the top of Solidsteel’s line, made by hand in Italy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill It Hold What You Have Bought?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Bottom Shelf Is Built for a Power Amplifier\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe lowest bay has 12 inches of clear height where the levels above it have 8. Reviewing the HF-4 for hi-fi+, Alan Sircom called that bottom shelf “power-amp friendly,” which is exactly what it is for: the heaviest, hottest box in the system goes at the bottom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThirty Millimeters of Shelf Under Your Gear\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe lacquered MDF platforms are 30 millimeters thick, which is close to an inch and a quarter and roughly double what most racks use. Each one carries up to 176 pounds, and that figure is the same on the top shelf as on the bottom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eRoom for Gear That Ignores Standard Sizes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThese are the largest shelves Solidsteel makes. The top platform is 25.4 inches wide and 22.1 deep, with 21.1 by 22.1 inches usable on the levels below. That depth is the point — esoteric components rarely respect a standard chassis footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAdd a Level as the System Grows\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe HF is modular, so a rack gains shelves rather than being replaced. A level needs an inner shelf and a set of four \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/solidsteel-hf-series-hyperspike-add-on-kit-8-inch-polished-steel-posts-w-hardware-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003e8-inch polished steel posts\u003c\/a\u003e with hardware. Call us on 800-942-0220 and we will confirm the shelf in the finish you own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere the Uprights Meet, and Why It Matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration upward and speakers put more of it into the room. A rack either hands that on to the components or gives it somewhere else to go. The Hyperspike system makes its argument at the joints rather than in the materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Spike Into a Dimple, at Every Joint\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf’s uprights end in an adjustable spike with a locking mechanism, seated in a dimple in the upright beneath. Contact between levels happens at four points instead of across flat faces, so every shelf is isolated from the one under it rather than bolted to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eO-Rings Between the Shelves\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRubber O-rings sit at those junctions, working much as piston rings do — tightening the fit while cutting what passes across it. Solidsteel calls the whole arrangement the Hyperspike Vibration Free System, and it is the reason the range exists.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Spikes, and the Cups That Go Under Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAt the floor, four large spikes carry the whole rack on minimal contact. Four metal cupped feet are supplied with it, and on a suspended wooden floor those are what you want under the spikes rather than the spikes themselves in the boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eNothing Boxes the Amplifier In\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThere is no back, no side panel and no door anywhere on this rack. A power amplifier on the bottom shelf sheds heat upward and sideways into open air, which is the one thing a closed cabinet cannot offer whatever is cut into its panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 12-inch bottom bay helps twice over. It takes a tall chassis, and it leaves genuine clearance above a component that runs hot rather than the minimum a shelf spacing happens to allow.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSet It Level Once and Leave It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe rack goes together as a bolt-together frame, and Solidsteel publishes a step-by-step installation guide for the series, embedded below. Watch it before opening the carton and the order of operations makes sense from the start.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLevel it on the spikes before anything goes on the shelves. These are heavy platforms and a fully loaded HF is not something you want to lift to reach a foot underneath, so getting it right while it is empty is time well spent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThink about the floor as well as the rack. Loaded to capacity this is a great deal of weight standing on four points, so on older suspended floorboards use the supplied cups and choose a spot over a joist rather than mid-span.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIt Is Meant to Be Looked At\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tubular supports are solid INOX stainless steel, an inch and a half across, polished rather than painted. Set against gloss black or gloss white lacquered shelves with rounded, corner-free edges, the frame is the part you see, and it has been finished accordingly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBoth finishes run on the same steel, so the choice is about what the room wants. This is a rack designed to be seen with the equipment on it, not one meant to disappear behind a door.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlan Sircom, reviewing the HF-4 for hi-fi+: “Solidsteel has long been the choice of audio manufacturers at shows and demonstrations worldwide to show off their products in as neutral a way as possible, for good reason.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the rack itself he was direct. What it does, he wrote, is “inspire confidence” — set and leveled, it goes nowhere. He put much of its mass down to the 30mm shelves rather than the steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel’s official installation guide for the HF series, worth watching before the carton is opened:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/xajFSxg38jc\" title=\"Solidsteel HF Series – Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel Hyperspike HF Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own a serious power amplifier — the bottom bay gives 12 inches of clear height and 176 pounds of capacity, with no need to hunt for a shelf that will take it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour components are not standard sizes — these are the largest shelves Solidsteel builds, 22.1 inches deep, for gear that ignores the usual footprint.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want the joints doing the work — spikes into dimples and rubber O-rings at every level, rather than shelves bolted to a single welded frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nThe rack will be seen — polished INOX uprights and gloss lacquered shelves, made by hand in Italy and finished to be looked at.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want to go further under the source — the platforms are neutral enough that \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e sit on top of them cleanly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/solidsteel-hf-series-hyperspike-add-on-kit-8-inch-polished-steel-posts-w-hardware-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eHF-Series 8-inch post kit\u003c\/a\u003e — four polished steel posts with hardware, the other half of adding a level to a rack you already own.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — between a source and its shelf, on a platform neutral enough to make the difference audible either way.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is the widest surface on the rack and has nothing above it, which is where a deck belongs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — work your runs out from where each component will actually sit, since the bottom bay is deeper than the rest.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA maximum of 176 pounds, which is 80 kilograms, and the figure applies to every shelf including the top. The platforms themselves are 30 millimeters of lacquered MDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my power amplifier fit on the bottom shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe bottom bay has 12 inches of clear height against 8 inches for the levels above it, and it is sized deliberately for a large amplifier. Check your chassis width against the 21.1 inches usable between the uprights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat does the Hyperspike name mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf’s uprights end in a locking adjustable spike that seats into a dimple in the upright below, and four larger spikes carry the rack at the floor. Levels meet at points rather than across flat faces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. A level takes an inner shelf and a set of four 8-inch posts with hardware. Call us on 800-942-0220 before ordering and we will confirm the inner shelf available in the finish you have.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it damage my floor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour metal cupped feet are supplied to sit under the spikes, which is what you want on hardwood, tile or a suspended floor. Fully loaded this rack carries real weight on four points, so use the cups and pick a solid spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the difference between the gloss black and gloss white versions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe shelf lacquer, and nothing else. Both run on the same polished stainless steel uprights with the same dimensions, the same capacity and the same hardware.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981208936621,"sku":"NEW-SSHF2-GLSWHT","price":2199.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSHF2_GLSWHT_01_2024__23853.1713288123.1280.1280_527ba7b5-b8cb-4a68-9d71-7f03266763e2.jpg?v=1778153213"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-triple-20-oc-with-triple-width-shelf-black-oak-aluminum","title":"Salamander Synergy Triple 20 OC with Triple-Width Shelf - Black Oak\/Aluminum","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003ci\u003eShown with optional perforated steel doors and solid wood side panels.\u003c\/i\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSupport for Large TVs and Center Speakers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander adds new functionality to its best-selling Synergy Triple 20 TV rack with the Triple 20 Center by including a triple-width shelf for your center channel speaker. The generous-size shelf is a full 65.75\" wide and 19.75\" deep, with 9 inches of vertical height.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis furniture-quality rack enhances both the appearance and performance of home theater equipment. With its rich wood finish and elegant styling, it looks like a piece of fine furniture. But Salamander's Synergy Triple 20 Center TV stand is a hard worker that provides plenty of space for AV components, with a bottom shelf that accommodates as many as three 17\"-wide components. The top platform will support large TVs, including plasma displays up to 60 inches - and most direct view or table-top sets!\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Salamander Triple 20 Center TV cabinet is a high-end piece of furniture with a mile-deep hardwood finish and exquisitely clean design. The warmth of the rich hardwood finish seems to radiate throughout the entire room. The quality recalls the finest classic American and European cabinetry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch5\u003eAdd Doors and Cabinet Sides\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe modular design of the Triple 20 Center lets you add doors, cabinet sides, and other accessories for extra versatility and design possibilities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch5\u003eHolds Lots of Gear\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe 66.75\"-wide and 19.75\"-deep top platform will accommodate most big-screen TVs and monitors. The Triple 20 Center includes a removable black rear panel with a wire management feature that keeps cables out of sight and out of the way.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Triple 20 Center is 21\" high, 66.75\" wide, and 19.75\" deep. Adjustable level glide feet are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cimg style=\"vertical-align: middle; padding-right: 5px;\" width=\"25\" height=\"25\" alt=\"warning icon\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-weight: bold; font-size: 14px;\"\u003eWARNING:\u003c\/span\u003e Cancer and Reproductive Harm - \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.p65warnings.ca.gov\/\" title=\"California Proposition 65 link\" style=\"text-decoration: none; color: #2f84eb;\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ewww.P65Warnings.ca.gov\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Black Oak\/Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45981222502573,"sku":"NEW-SMSLC20-BLK-ALU","price":1699.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSLC20_BLKALU_01__61649.1689623260.1280.1280_55c40618-d5c7-4fec-b688-19265b9546fd.jpg?v=1778102840"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-twin-30-rack-base-walnut-shelves-black-posts","title":"Salamander Synergy Twin 30 Rack Base - Walnut Shelves - Black Posts","description":"\u003ch3\u003eGet More Room for Your Gear with Synergy Twin Racks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eLarger audio\/video systems need lots of room to spread out, and Twin Racks from Synergy provide the space you need. Modular Synergy racks have height-adjustable shelves and options for adding side and back panels, doors, casters, and accessory drawers. All racks feature strong aluminum posts and oversized composite wood shelves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe January \/ February 2004 issue of \u003cem\u003eDVD ETC.\u003c\/em\u003e magazine awarded the Twin 30 its Top Choice Award as one of the best AV products of 2003. \"The Salamander Synergy system is a modular design, allowing you to build everything from TV stands to full entertainment centers.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSynergy Twin 30: Room for Complete A\/V Systems!\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis beautiful 32\"-tall, eight-shelf rack includes four fully adjustable internal shelves - including one, extra heavy duty shelf which holds up to 250lbs.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ Black \/ New","offer_id":45981237575853,"sku":"NEW-SMSN30-WAL-BLK","price":1179.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSN30_WALBLK_01-Large__69366.1709054640.1280.1280_c182609c-285c-4469-9991-5eca1d906c07.jpg?v=1778144418"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-s40-6-shelf-audio-rack-walnut-black","title":"Salamander Synergy S40 6-Shelf Audio Rack - Walnut\/Black","description":"\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e\u003cem\u003ePlease Note: The price listed is for the Synergy S40 Rack only. Doors and side panels are additional optional items.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRecommended Component 2024 – \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e\n\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eThe Right Combination of Features and Performance\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eA Gorgeous Hard-Working AV Rack You Can Expand And Customize\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe one sure thing about today's audio and video systems is that they never stand still. Changes in technology, improvements in products, and changing listening and viewing habits necessitate frequent changes in the elements within the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eTo keep pace with additions and changes in the audio\/video system, Salvatore Carrabba, Salamander Design's founder and chief design engineer, created the Synergy modular audio\/video furniture line, which over the years has turned into a classic in the industry. Its high-performance capabilities and raft of features makes it as sought after today as it was when it was first introduced.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003e\"Recommended Component\" Honors\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e honored a Salamander S40 by awarding it the magazine's coveted Recommend Component status for 2024.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eAccording to \u003cem\u003eStereophile\u003c\/em\u003e, \"In search of a rack that would hold his growing collection of gear and provide easy access for swapping review samples in and out, KR hit on a double-width Salamander Synergy S40 rack, which he custom-ordered with a pull-out shelf and six Salamander Robot Feet. The finished product stands 44\" high yet is 'impressively stiff and rigid.\"' KR concluded: \"[I]t looks good, holds everything, and can accommodate visiting review samples.'\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eThe Right Combination of Features and Performance\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander's Synergy S40 six-shelf cabinet offers just the right combination of features and performance for many audio and home theater systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis beautifully simple 42\"-tall, six-shelf cabinet has four fully adjustable black MDF internal shelves, including one extra heavy duty shelf which holds up to 250 lb. The included black rear panel effectively conceals cables and quickly removes with thumbscrews to provide essential component access.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe included perforated steel door with black finish helps protect your components from dust, while keeping them running cool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eConvenient Modular Design\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSynergy racks use a convenient modular design. This means you can expand and change the Synergy rack by adding additional shelves, drawers, doors, side panels, casters or another rack extension on top or bottom of the existing cabinet. You can even attach extension shelves to the side of the cabinet to create a complete A\/V entertainment system. Whatever your system, we can build a Synergy rack to suit your need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eInside the Synergy Cabinet...\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy rack consists of an extra large top and base shelf held together by extremely strong and rigid slotted extruded aluminum posts. The slots in the aluminum posts hold the hardware for attaching accessories such as side panels, doors, extra shelves, drawers, etc. A Synergy cabinet can be assembled in minutes using simple tools.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"New \/ Walnut \/ Black \/ New","offer_id":45981450436781,"sku":"NEW-SMSU40-WAL-BLK","price":909.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/DMSALS40WB_000__52015.1728064654.1280.1280_8163c667-71ba-4f77-bd82-dd9dab4910cb.jpg?v=1778145248"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-s20-3-shelf-audio-rack-black-oak-aluminum-posts","title":"Salamander Synergy S20 3-Shelf Audio Rack - Black Oak - Aluminum Posts","description":"\u003ch3\u003eGorgeous Audio\/Video Racks You Can Expand and Customize\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe one sure thing about today's audio and video systems: they never stand still. Changes in technology, improvements in products, and changing listening and viewing habits necessitate frequent changes in the elements within the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eTo keep pace with additions and changes in the audio\/video system, Salvatore Carrabba, Salamander Design's founder and chief design engineer, created the new Synergy modular audio\/video furniture line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eUnique Modular Design can be Easily Changed to Suit any System\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSynergy racks are a modular design. This means you can expand and change the Synergy rack by adding additional shelves, drawers, doors, side panels, casters or another rack extension on top or bottom of the existing cabinet. You can even attach extension shelves to the side of the cabinet to create a complete A\/V entertainment system. Whatever your system, we can build a Synergy rack to suit your need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eInside the Synergy Cabinet...\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy rack consists of an extra large top and base shelf held together by extremely strong and rigid slotted extruded aluminum posts. The slots in the aluminum posts hold the hardware for attaching accessories such as side panels, doors, extra shelves, drawers, etc. A Synergy cabinet can be assembled in minutes using simple tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSimple, Beautiful, and Strong Three-Shelf Synergy S20 Suits Many Systems\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander's S20 three-shelf cabinet offers just the right combination of features and performance for many audio and home theater systems. This beautifully simple 22\"-tall, three-shelf cabinet has one fully adjustable black MDF internal shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Black Oak \/ Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45981460168877,"sku":"NEW-SMSU20-BLK-ALU","price":549.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSU20_BLK_ALU_01_2024__50766.1707930729.1280.1280_01a11cce-df0d-4d85-bb56-e1e3225cbb8d.jpg?v=1778102876"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-s20-3-shelf-audio-rack-walnut-aluminum-posts","title":"Salamander Synergy S20 3-Shelf Audio Rack - Walnut - Aluminum Posts","description":"\u003ch3\u003eGorgeous Audio\/Video Racks You Can Expand and Customize\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe one sure thing about today's audio and video systems: they never stand still. Changes in technology, improvements in products, and changing listening and viewing habits necessitate frequent changes in the elements within the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eTo keep pace with additions and changes in the audio\/video system, Salvatore Carrabba, Salamander Design's founder and chief design engineer, created the new Synergy modular audio\/video furniture line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eUnique Modular Design can be Easily Changed to Suit any System\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSynergy racks are a modular design. This means you can expand and change the Synergy rack by adding additional shelves, drawers, doors, side panels, casters or another rack extension on top or bottom of the existing cabinet. You can even attach extension shelves to the side of the cabinet to create a complete A\/V entertainment system. Whatever your system, we can build a Synergy rack to suit your need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eInside the Synergy Cabinet...\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy rack consists of an extra large top and base shelf held together by extremely strong and rigid slotted extruded aluminum posts. The slots in the aluminum posts hold the hardware for attaching accessories such as side panels, doors, extra shelves, drawers, etc. A Synergy cabinet can be assembled in minutes using simple tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSimple, Beautiful, and Strong Three-Shelf Synergy S20 Suits Many Systems\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander's S20 three-shelf cabinet offers just the right combination of features and performance for many audio and home theater systems. This beautifully simple 22\"-tall, three-shelf cabinet has one fully adjustable black MDF internal shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45981504438445,"sku":"NEW-SMSU20-WALALU","price":549.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSU20_WAL_ALU_01_2024__32435.1707932973.1280.1280_cf20aaa8-0420-4437-869d-ac815a35ecd3.jpg?v=1778115519"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-s20-3-shelf-audio-rack-walnut-black-posts","title":"Salamander Synergy S20 3-Shelf Audio Rack - Walnut - Black Posts","description":"\u003ch3\u003eGorgeous Audio\/Video Racks You Can Expand and Customize\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe one sure thing about today's audio and video systems: they never stand still. Changes in technology, improvements in products, and changing listening and viewing habits necessitate frequent changes in the elements within the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eTo keep pace with additions and changes in the audio\/video system, Salvatore Carrabba, Salamander Design's founder and chief design engineer, created the new Synergy modular audio\/video furniture line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eUnique Modular Design can be Easily Changed to Suit any System\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSynergy racks are a modular design. This means you can expand and change the Synergy rack by adding additional shelves, drawers, doors, side panels, casters or another rack extension on top or bottom of the existing cabinet. You can even attach extension shelves to the side of the cabinet to create a complete A\/V entertainment system. Whatever your system, we can build a Synergy rack to suit your need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eInside the Synergy Cabinet...\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy rack consists of an extra large top and base shelf held together by extremely strong and rigid slotted extruded aluminum posts. The slots in the aluminum posts hold the hardware for attaching accessories such as side panels, doors, extra shelves, drawers, etc. A Synergy cabinet can be assembled in minutes using simple tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSimple, Beautiful, and Strong Three-Shelf Synergy S20 Suits Many Systems\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander's S20 three-shelf cabinet offers just the right combination of features and performance for many audio and home theater systems. This beautifully simple 22\"-tall, three-shelf cabinet has one fully adjustable black MDF internal shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ Black \/ New","offer_id":45981509910701,"sku":"NEW-SMSU20-WAL-BLK","price":549.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSU20_WAL_BLK_01_2024__76480.1707932327.1280.1280_b16e3a9a-fe73-441d-9ef3-7354e4949e7f.jpg?v=1778145172"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-s30-5-shelf-audio-rack-cherry-black","title":"Salamander Synergy S30 5-Shelf Audio Rack - Cherry\/Black","description":"\u003ch4\u003e\n\u003ci\u003eStereophile Magazine\u003c\/i\u003e Recommended Component\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003chr\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003ePacked with Features and Performance\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander's S30 five-shelf cabinet offers just the right combination of features and performance for many audio and home theater systems. This beautifully simple 32\"-tall, five-shelf cabinet has three fully adjustable black MDF internal shelves - including one extra heavy-duty shelf which holds up to 250 lbs. The included black rear panel effectively conceals cables and quickly removes with thumbscrews to provide essential component access.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eGorgeous Audio\/Video Racks You Can Expand and Customize\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe one sure thing about today's audio and video systems: they never stand still. Changes in technology, improvements in products, and changing listening and viewing habits necessitate frequent changes in the elements within the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eTo keep pace with additions and changes in the audio\/video system, Salvatore Carrabba, Salamander Design's founder and chief design engineer, created the new Synergy modular audio\/video furniture line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eUnique Modular Design can be Easily Changed to Suit any System\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSynergy racks are a modular design. This means you can expand and change the Synergy rack by adding additional shelves, drawers, doors, side panels, casters or another rack extension on top or bottom of the existing cabinet. You can even attach extension shelves to the side of the cabinet to create a complete A\/V entertainment system. Whatever your system, we can build a Synergy rack to suit your need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eInside the Synergy Cabinet...\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy rack consists of an extra large top and base shelf held together by extremely strong and rigid slotted extruded aluminum posts. The slots in the aluminum posts hold the hardware for attaching accessories such as side panels, doors, extra shelves, drawers, etc. A Synergy cabinet can be assembled in minutes using simple tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cimg style=\"vertical-align: middle;padding-right: 5px;\" src=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/p65-warning-icon.png\" width=\"25\" height=\"25\" alt=\"warning icon\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-weight:bold;font-size: 14px;\"\u003eWARNING:\u003c\/span\u003e Cancer and Reproductive Harm - \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.p65warnings.ca.gov\/\" title=\"California Proposition 65 link\" target=\"_blank\" style=\"text-decoration: none;color: #2f84eb;\"\u003ewww.P65Warnings.ca.gov\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Cherry \/ Black \/ New","offer_id":45981544972461,"sku":"NEW-SMSU30-CHE-BLK","price":779.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSU30_CHEBLK_01-Large__63515.1705012406.1280.1280_1921f874-999d-42c9-a59f-474d1246c150.jpg?v=1778144446"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-twin-20-oc-with-double-width-shelf-black-oak-aluminum","title":"Salamander Synergy Twin 20 OC with Double-Width Shelf - Black Oak\/Aluminum","description":"\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e\u003ci\u003eNote: Image shown with the optional doors and side panels.\n\u003c\/i\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eSupport Your TV and Center Channel Speaker\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander adds new functionality to its best-selling Synergy Twin 20 TV rack with the Twin 20 Center by including a double-width shelf for your center channel speaker. This shelf is 44.5\" wide and 19.75\" deep, with 9 inches of vertical height. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis furniture-quality rack enhances both the appearance and performance of home theater equipment. With its rich wood finish and elegant styling, it looks like a piece of fine furniture. But Salamander's Synergy Twin 20 Center TV stand is a hard worker that provides plenty of space for AV components, with a bottom shelf that accommodates two 17\"-wide components. The top platform will support large TVs, including plasma displays up to 42 inches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Salamander Twin 20 Center TV cabinet is a high-end piece of furniture with a mile-deep hardwood finish and exquisitely clean design. The warmth of the rich hardwood finish seems to radiate throughout the entire room. The quality recalls the finest classic American and European cabinetry. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eAdd Doors and Cabinet Sides\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe modular design of the Twin 20 Center lets you add doors, cabinet sides, and other accessories for extra versatility and design possibilities. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eHolds Lots of Gear\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e The 44.5\"-wide top shelf has space for 32\"-42\" flat panel TVs at the ideal height. The bottom shelf accommodates two standard-width components. The Twin 20 Center includes a removable black rear panel with a wire management feature that keeps cables out of sight and out of the way. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Twin 20 Center is 21\" high, 44.5\" wide, and 19.75\" deep. Adjustable level glide feet are included. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cimg style=\"vertical-align: middle;padding-right: 5px;\" src=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/p65-warning-icon.png\" width=\"25\" height=\"25\" alt=\"warning icon\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-weight:bold;font-size: 14px;\"\u003eWARNING:\u003c\/span\u003e Cancer and Reproductive Harm - \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.p65warnings.ca.gov\/\" title=\"California Proposition 65 link\" target=\"_blank\" style=\"text-decoration: none;color: #2f84eb;\"\u003ewww.P65Warnings.ca.gov\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45981575413933,"sku":"NEW-SMSNC20-BLK-ALU","price":999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMKSNC20_BA-LARGE__18217.1705013563.1280.1280_774bc4a3-248f-4e7f-8b32-1aa7dd39912e.jpg?v=1778144801"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-s20-3-shelf-audio-rack-cherry-aluminum-posts","title":"Salamander Synergy S20 3-Shelf Audio Rack - Cherry - Aluminum Posts","description":"\u003ch3\u003eGorgeous Audio\/Video Racks You Can Expand and Customize\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe one sure thing about today's audio and video systems: they never stand still. Changes in technology, improvements in products, and changing listening and viewing habits necessitate frequent changes in the elements within the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eTo keep pace with additions and changes in the audio\/video system, Salvatore Carrabba, Salamander Design's founder and chief design engineer, created the new Synergy modular audio\/video furniture line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eUnique Modular Design can be Easily Changed to Suit any System\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSynergy racks are a modular design. This means you can expand and change the Synergy rack by adding additional shelves, drawers, doors, side panels, casters or another rack extension on top or bottom of the existing cabinet. You can even attach extension shelves to the side of the cabinet to create a complete A\/V entertainment system. Whatever your system, we can build a Synergy rack to suit your need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eInside the Synergy Cabinet...\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy rack consists of an extra large top and base shelf held together by extremely strong and rigid slotted extruded aluminum posts. The slots in the aluminum posts hold the hardware for attaching accessories such as side panels, doors, extra shelves, drawers, etc. A Synergy cabinet can be assembled in minutes using simple tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSimple, Beautiful, and Strong Three-Shelf Synergy S20 Suits Many Systems\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander's S20 three-shelf cabinet offers just the right combination of features and performance for many audio and home theater systems. This beautifully simple 22\"-tall, three-shelf cabinet has one fully adjustable black MDF internal shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Cherry \/ Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45981599695021,"sku":"NEW-SMSU20-CHE-ALU","price":549.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSU20_CHE_ALU_01_2024__89181.1707933424.1280.1280_6ed02b96-b11b-4654-b4e9-d9efd357d129.jpg?v=1778116674"},{"product_id":"salamander-designs-synergy-model-237-cherry-aluminum","title":"Salamander Designs Synergy Model 237 - Cherry\/Aluminum","description":"\u003ch3\u003eOne of Salamander's Most Popular AV Cabinets\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy Model 237 is one of the most popular low-boy, triple-door audio\/video cabinets from Salamander Designs. It holds large amount of gear and will accommodate a large sized TV. This cabinet may mounted to the wall by simply removing the feet and attaching the wall mounting accessory. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis cabinet has three side-by-side doors and a generous amount of space for your AV components inside and on the expansive top platform. The 65.75\"-wide top platform accommodates flat panel TVs up to 75\" and weighing up to 350 lbs. The Model 237 is 21\" tall, and its interior shelves hold up to 75 lb. each. The fixed bottom shelf supports up to 350 lb.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003eRock-Solid Framework\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eLike all Salamander Synergy-series cabinets, the Model 237 has a 'smart' aluminum skeleton with wood veneer surfaces and solid wood door frames. This rock-solid framework securely holds an array of high performance features while hiding them from view. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eModel 237 is rich with features. Perforated door inserts permit IR signals, add ventilation, and mask speakers. Snap-on hinges fully extend doors and remove easily for better in-cabinet access. Removable rear panel allows easy access to A\/V components. Precision leveling feet keep the cabinet level even on uneven floors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe clever modular design lets you add extra features to your cabinet. A range of attractive finishes blend nicely with any decor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003eDimensions and Weight Capacity\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Model 237 is 65.75\" wide, 21\" high, and 19.75\" deep. Interior dimensions are 19.75” W x 17.75” H x 18” D (per bay). It has three height-adjustable shelves (one per bay) measuring 19.75\" W x 18.5\" D and a fixed bottom shelf. The height-adjustable shelves are 0.5\" thick. The top platform supports up to 350 lb. The total maximum weight capacity is 1000 lb.  \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Cherry\/Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45981634199725,"sku":"NEW-SMSB237-CHEALU","price":1999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSB237_WALALU_02-Large__15220.1705075088.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778112203"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-twin-30-base-black-oak-black","title":"Salamander Synergy Twin 30 Base - Black Oak\/Black","description":"\u003ch3\u003eGet More Room for Your Gear with Synergy Twin Racks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eLarger audio\/video systems need lots of room to spread out, and Twin Racks from Synergy provide the space you need. Modular Synergy racks have height-adjustable shelves and options for adding side and back panels, doors, casters, and accessory drawers. All racks feature strong aluminum posts and oversized composite wood shelves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe January \/ February 2004 issue of \u003cem\u003eDVD ETC.\u003c\/em\u003e magazine awarded the Twin 30 its Top Choice Award as one of the best AV products of 2003. \"The Salamander Synergy system is a modular design, allowing you to build everything from TV stands to full entertainment centers.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSynergy Twin 30: Room for Complete A\/V Systems!\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis beautiful 32\"-tall, eight-shelf rack includes four fully adjustable internal shelves - including one, extra heavy duty shelf which holds up to 250lbs.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ Black \/ New","offer_id":45981773168813,"sku":"NEW-SMSN30-BLK-BLK","price":1179.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSN30_BLKBLK_01-Large__05584.1709053170.1280.1280_4f8c0a3e-4d4f-4591-8975-ec476bd3918c.jpg?v=1778145211"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-s3-4-four-shelf-audio-rack-walnut","title":"Solidsteel S3-4 Four-Shelf Audio Rack - Walnut","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel S3 — Italian Engineering, Built Around What You Put On It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel has been making audio supports in Italy for more than twenty years, and the S3 is where that experience meets a real-world budget. Anodized aluminum columns, powder-coated steel, and shelves cut from laminated MDF, sized for full-width components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat separates it from furniture is what happens inside the columns. Each one is filled with damping material, so the structure under your system has somewhere to send the vibration it picks up, instead of handing it straight back to the components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill Your Tallest Component Fit?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery shelf measures 580 by 430 millimeters — about 22.8 by 16.9 inches — and is 30 millimeters thick. The top platform gives you that full width. Between the lower shelves the columns bring the usable span to about 19.7 inches, which is still wider than the great majority of full-size components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSet the Shelves Where Your Amplifier Needs Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThis is the part that decides whether your amplifier goes in. Shelf positions adjust from 145 to 365 millimeters apart — 5.7 to 14.4 inches — so a tall tube amplifier or a stacked pair of small boxes can have the room it needs, taken from a shelf that does not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePut Your Heaviest Amplifier on Any Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf carries up to 60 kilograms, or 132 pounds. That is a serious power amplifier per level, not a nominal figure, and it comes from columns that thread together rather than welded joints that flex.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIt Grows With the System\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe S3 is built to be added to. An inner shelf and a set of four poles turn a three-shelf rack into a four, or a four into a five, using the same hardware the rack was assembled with — so the rack you buy now is not the rack you are stuck with.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYour Turntable Goes on the Top Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlways. The top platform has nothing above it, so a dust cover opens freely, and it is the one position where the deck sits farthest from everything else that vibrates. It is also the widest surface on the rack. Browse our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e for the deck to put there.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow It Manages Vibration\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFloors carry vibration. Speakers put it into the room, the room puts it back into the floor, and whatever your components stand on either passes it along or gives it somewhere to go. That is the whole argument for a proper rack rather than a shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy These Columns Don't Ring\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe S3's support poles are anodized aluminum, and each is filled internally with sound-absorbing damping material. A hollow tube rings; a filled one does not. That is the difference between a structure that stores vibration and one that drains it away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes, and Something to Stand Them On\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes on M8 threads couple the rack to the floor and level it on boards that are never quite flat. Stainless steel floor-protective discs come in the box, so the spikes can do their job on a wood floor without marking it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMass in the Right Places\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGalvanized steel under powder coating, anodized aluminum columns, laminated MDF shelves. Three materials with three different resonant behaviors, which is the point — no single frequency finds the whole structure sympathetic, so nothing rings in unison.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eKeeping Your Components Cool\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAn open frame lets air move freely around every side of a component, which is something no closed cabinet can offer. Amplifiers and streamers shed heat upward and sideways, and here there is nothing in the way of either.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe adjustable spacing matters here too. A class-A amplifier that runs warm can be given 14.4 inches of clear air while a thin streamer takes 5.7, rather than every component getting the same gap whether it needs it or not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYou Can Build It by Hand\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe columns thread into the shelves by hand and the spikes screw into the column ends. Solidsteel publishes an official installation guide, linked below, and the sequence is worth watching once before you start — assembling each shelf's hardware upside down first makes the whole job quicker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLevel it with the spikes before anything goes on the shelves, not after. A rack that starts level stays level once it is loaded, and the spikes are far easier to reach with nothing standing on top of them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere It Will Live in Your Room\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack and walnut, both on the same structure. The lines are plain enough to sit quietly beside most furniture, which is usually what you want from something holding several thousand dollars of electronics.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel's own installation guide walks through the assembly step by step:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/AfdyFc5POuA\" title=\"Solidsteel S3 Series - Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYuri Brus looks at the three-shelf S3-3 in use:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/hMzjCuMfauw\" title=\"Solidsteel S3-3 HiFi Rack Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel S3 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want a support engineered rather than styled — damping-filled aluminum columns and 132 pounds a shelf come from an audio company, not a furniture maker.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour components are different heights — adjustable spacing from 5.7 to 14.4 inches means the tall amplifier and the slim streamer each get what they need.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou run a turntable — the top platform is the widest surface on the rack, with nothing above it to limit a dust cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour gear runs warm — an open frame puts air on every side, and you choose how much sits above anything that needs it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou expect the system to grow — add a level whenever you need one with an S3 inner shelf and a set of four poles from our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eadd-on shelves\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rack is the foundation; these are what usually go on it and under it:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet or platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — the S3 handles what comes up through the floor, and these address what a component generates on its own.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is sized and sited for one.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnect cables\u003c\/a\u003e — components spread over several levels need longer runs than a single shelf does.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAn add-on shelf and poles\u003c\/a\u003e — the way an S3 grows a level at a time instead of being replaced.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my tall amplifier fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlmost certainly. Shelf positions adjust from 145 to 365 millimeters apart, which is 5.7 to 14.4 inches of clear height. Measure your tallest component, add room for air above it, and set the shelf to suit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSixty kilograms, or 132 pounds. That is per shelf, and it is the figure Solidsteel publishes for the S3 — a step up from the 110 pounds per shelf of the S2 series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. An S3 inner shelf and a set of four poles with hardware will take a three-shelf rack to four, or a four to five. The parts are the same ones the rack was built from, so the result is a factory rack rather than a modification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe columns thread into the shelves by hand and the spikes screw into the ends. Solidsteel publishes a step-by-step installation guide, which is embedded above — watch it once and the sequence is obvious.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere should the turntable go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the top platform. Nothing sits above it, so the dust cover opens freely, it is the widest surface on the rack, and it puts the deck as far as possible from everything else.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat comes in the box besides the rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes on M8 threads, and a set of stainless steel floor-protective discs so the spikes can be used on a finished floor. The hardware to assemble it is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or getting the most from your components? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981783294125,"sku":"NEW-SSS3W-4-WAL","price":999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSS3_4_WAL_01_2023__84248.1707946409.1280.1280_c24cdffc-b908-43ed-b7fa-d661f6ed9c5a.jpg?v=1778148870"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-hyperspike-hf-a-amplifier-stand-gloss-white","title":"Solidsteel Hyperspike HF-A Amplifier Stand - Gloss White","description":"\u003ch3\u003eSupport Your Amp with No-Compromise Strength and Isolation Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSupport your power amp with no-compromise strength and isolation features with the Solidsteel Hyperspike HF-A Amplifier Stand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eDon't just get your stereo amp or monoblock amps off the floor. Any amp stand will help with air circulation compared to just setting your amp on the carpet. You went the extra mile when you bought your amp. So don't skimp when it comes to choosing an amp stand that can take performance to the next level.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eHigh-end audio components, especially gear that can weigh quite a bit, require absolutely rock-solid support and serious isolation features. On both accounts you can't do better than Solidsteel's Hyperspike HF-A amplifier stand. Otherwise you risk missing the full audio potential.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe appearance of the HF-A is fully the equal of its feature set. Gleaming stainless steel supports are impressive to behold, and the glossy black or white lacquered shelves are beyond anything found on all but the most expensive racks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eHyperspike Design\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Hyperspike name comes from the large Hyperspike floor spikes that decouple the rack from your listening room. This stunning amp stand features stainless-steel frames made of 1.5\"-diameter tubes that support a handsome white or black lacquered MDF shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe HF-A is 6.3\" tall (including Hyperspike floor feet and Hyperspike floor pads), 23.6\" wide, and 15.9\" deep. It will support an amp or other component weighing up to 176 lb.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eStrong, Gleaming Tubular Frame Construction\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe four-pillar, tubular frame construction is designed to give maximum component support and minimum physical contact with the floor for isolation from room-borne vibrations. The tubular supports are made of high quality solid INOX stainless steel, polished by a state-of-the art process for a smooth and shimmering finish.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981834870957,"sku":"NEW-SSHFA-GLSWHT","price":999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSHFA_GLSBLK_02_2024__91904.1713292837.1280.1280_bddba846-9a6a-47c2-87c5-8df677716f8e.jpg?v=1778153248"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-s3-4-four-shelf-audio-rack-black","title":"Solidsteel S3-4 Four-Shelf Audio Rack - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel S3 — Italian Engineering, Built Around What You Put On It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel has been making audio supports in Italy for more than twenty years, and the S3 is where that experience meets a real-world budget. Anodized aluminum columns, powder-coated steel, and shelves cut from laminated MDF, sized for full-width components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat separates it from furniture is what happens inside the columns. Each one is filled with damping material, so the structure under your system has somewhere to send the vibration it picks up, instead of handing it straight back to the components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill Your Tallest Component Fit?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery shelf measures 580 by 430 millimeters — about 22.8 by 16.9 inches — and is 30 millimeters thick. The top platform gives you that full width. Between the lower shelves the columns bring the usable span to about 19.7 inches, which is still wider than the great majority of full-size components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSet the Shelves Where Your Amplifier Needs Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThis is the part that decides whether your amplifier goes in. Shelf positions adjust from 145 to 365 millimeters apart — 5.7 to 14.4 inches — so a tall tube amplifier or a stacked pair of small boxes can have the room it needs, taken from a shelf that does not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePut Your Heaviest Amplifier on Any Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf carries up to 60 kilograms, or 132 pounds. That is a serious power amplifier per level, not a nominal figure, and it comes from columns that thread together rather than welded joints that flex.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIt Grows With the System\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe S3 is built to be added to. An inner shelf and a set of four poles turn a three-shelf rack into a four, or a four into a five, using the same hardware the rack was assembled with — so the rack you buy now is not the rack you are stuck with.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYour Turntable Goes on the Top Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlways. The top platform has nothing above it, so a dust cover opens freely, and it is the one position where the deck sits farthest from everything else that vibrates. It is also the widest surface on the rack. Browse our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e for the deck to put there.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow It Manages Vibration\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFloors carry vibration. Speakers put it into the room, the room puts it back into the floor, and whatever your components stand on either passes it along or gives it somewhere to go. That is the whole argument for a proper rack rather than a shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy These Columns Don't Ring\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe S3's support poles are anodized aluminum, and each is filled internally with sound-absorbing damping material. A hollow tube rings; a filled one does not. That is the difference between a structure that stores vibration and one that drains it away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes, and Something to Stand Them On\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes on M8 threads couple the rack to the floor and level it on boards that are never quite flat. Stainless steel floor-protective discs come in the box, so the spikes can do their job on a wood floor without marking it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMass in the Right Places\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGalvanized steel under powder coating, anodized aluminum columns, laminated MDF shelves. Three materials with three different resonant behaviors, which is the point — no single frequency finds the whole structure sympathetic, so nothing rings in unison.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eKeeping Your Components Cool\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAn open frame lets air move freely around every side of a component, which is something no closed cabinet can offer. Amplifiers and streamers shed heat upward and sideways, and here there is nothing in the way of either.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe adjustable spacing matters here too. A class-A amplifier that runs warm can be given 14.4 inches of clear air while a thin streamer takes 5.7, rather than every component getting the same gap whether it needs it or not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYou Can Build It by Hand\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe columns thread into the shelves by hand and the spikes screw into the column ends. Solidsteel publishes an official installation guide, linked below, and the sequence is worth watching once before you start — assembling each shelf's hardware upside down first makes the whole job quicker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLevel it with the spikes before anything goes on the shelves, not after. A rack that starts level stays level once it is loaded, and the spikes are far easier to reach with nothing standing on top of them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere It Will Live in Your Room\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack and walnut, both on the same structure. The lines are plain enough to sit quietly beside most furniture, which is usually what you want from something holding several thousand dollars of electronics.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel's own installation guide walks through the assembly step by step:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/AfdyFc5POuA\" title=\"Solidsteel S3 Series - Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYuri Brus looks at the three-shelf S3-3 in use:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/hMzjCuMfauw\" title=\"Solidsteel S3-3 HiFi Rack Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel S3 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want a support engineered rather than styled — damping-filled aluminum columns and 132 pounds a shelf come from an audio company, not a furniture maker.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour components are different heights — adjustable spacing from 5.7 to 14.4 inches means the tall amplifier and the slim streamer each get what they need.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou run a turntable — the top platform is the widest surface on the rack, with nothing above it to limit a dust cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour gear runs warm — an open frame puts air on every side, and you choose how much sits above anything that needs it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou expect the system to grow — add a level whenever you need one with an S3 inner shelf and a set of four poles from our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eadd-on shelves\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rack is the foundation; these are what usually go on it and under it:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet or platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — the S3 handles what comes up through the floor, and these address what a component generates on its own.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is sized and sited for one.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnect cables\u003c\/a\u003e — components spread over several levels need longer runs than a single shelf does.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAn add-on shelf and poles\u003c\/a\u003e — the way an S3 grows a level at a time instead of being replaced.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my tall amplifier fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlmost certainly. Shelf positions adjust from 145 to 365 millimeters apart, which is 5.7 to 14.4 inches of clear height. Measure your tallest component, add room for air above it, and set the shelf to suit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSixty kilograms, or 132 pounds. That is per shelf, and it is the figure Solidsteel publishes for the S3 — a step up from the 110 pounds per shelf of the S2 series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. An S3 inner shelf and a set of four poles with hardware will take a three-shelf rack to four, or a four to five. The parts are the same ones the rack was built from, so the result is a factory rack rather than a modification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe columns thread into the shelves by hand and the spikes screw into the ends. Solidsteel publishes a step-by-step installation guide, which is embedded above — watch it once and the sequence is obvious.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere should the turntable go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the top platform. Nothing sits above it, so the dust cover opens freely, it is the widest surface on the rack, and it puts the deck as far as possible from everything else.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat comes in the box besides the rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes on M8 threads, and a set of stainless steel floor-protective discs so the spikes can be used on a finished floor. The hardware to assemble it is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or getting the most from your components? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981851058349,"sku":"NEW-SSS3-4-BLK","price":899.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSS3_4_BLK_01_2023__70103.1704742235.1280.1280_c25d7891-987c-43ae-a0d5-721b24031ebe.jpg?v=1778148849"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-s20-3-shelf-audio-rack-cherry-black-posts","title":"Salamander Synergy S20 3-Shelf Audio Rack - Cherry - Black Posts","description":"\u003ch3\u003eGorgeous Audio\/Video Racks You Can Expand and Customize\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe one sure thing about today's audio and video systems: they never stand still. Changes in technology, improvements in products, and changing listening and viewing habits necessitate frequent changes in the elements within the system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eTo keep pace with additions and changes in the audio\/video system, Salvatore Carrabba, Salamander Design's founder and chief design engineer, created the new Synergy modular audio\/video furniture line.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eUnique Modular Design can be Easily Changed to Suit any System\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSynergy racks are a modular design. This means you can expand and change the Synergy rack by adding additional shelves, drawers, doors, side panels, casters or another rack extension on top or bottom of the existing cabinet. You can even attach extension shelves to the side of the cabinet to create a complete A\/V entertainment system. Whatever your system, we can build a Synergy rack to suit your need.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eInside the Synergy Cabinet...\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy rack consists of an extra large top and base shelf held together by extremely strong and rigid slotted extruded aluminum posts. The slots in the aluminum posts hold the hardware for attaching accessories such as side panels, doors, extra shelves, drawers, etc. A Synergy cabinet can be assembled in minutes using simple tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSimple, Beautiful, and Strong Three-Shelf Synergy S20 Suits Many Systems\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander's S20 three-shelf cabinet offers just the right combination of features and performance for many audio and home theater systems. This beautifully simple 22\"-tall, three-shelf cabinet has one fully adjustable black MDF internal shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Cherry \/ Black \/ New","offer_id":45981853253805,"sku":"NEW-SMSU20-CHE-BLK","price":549.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSU20_CHE_BLK_01_2024__20290.1707932701.1280.1280_7b35b0c2-1df5-4178-a467-954564f68ea9.jpg?v=1778145167"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-s3-3-three-shelf-audio-rack-black","title":"Solidsteel S3-3 Three-Shelf Audio Rack - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel S3 — Italian Engineering, Built Around What You Put On It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel has been making audio supports in Italy for more than twenty years, and the S3 is where that experience meets a real-world budget. Anodized aluminum columns, powder-coated steel, and shelves cut from laminated MDF, sized for full-width components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat separates it from furniture is what happens inside the columns. Each one is filled with damping material, so the structure under your system has somewhere to send the vibration it picks up, instead of handing it straight back to the components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill Your Tallest Component Fit?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery shelf measures 580 by 430 millimeters — about 22.8 by 16.9 inches — and is 30 millimeters thick. The top platform gives you that full width. Between the lower shelves the columns bring the usable span to about 19.7 inches, which is still wider than the great majority of full-size components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSet the Shelves Where Your Amplifier Needs Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThis is the part that decides whether your amplifier goes in. Shelf positions adjust from 145 to 365 millimeters apart — 5.7 to 14.4 inches — so a tall tube amplifier or a stacked pair of small boxes can have the room it needs, taken from a shelf that does not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePut Your Heaviest Amplifier on Any Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf carries up to 60 kilograms, or 132 pounds. That is a serious power amplifier per level, not a nominal figure, and it comes from columns that thread together rather than welded joints that flex.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIt Grows With the System\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe S3 is built to be added to. An inner shelf and a set of four poles turn a three-shelf rack into a four, or a four into a five, using the same hardware the rack was assembled with — so the rack you buy now is not the rack you are stuck with.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYour Turntable Goes on the Top Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlways. The top platform has nothing above it, so a dust cover opens freely, and it is the one position where the deck sits farthest from everything else that vibrates. It is also the widest surface on the rack. Browse our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e for the deck to put there.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow It Manages Vibration\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFloors carry vibration. Speakers put it into the room, the room puts it back into the floor, and whatever your components stand on either passes it along or gives it somewhere to go. That is the whole argument for a proper rack rather than a shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy These Columns Don't Ring\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe S3's support poles are anodized aluminum, and each is filled internally with sound-absorbing damping material. A hollow tube rings; a filled one does not. That is the difference between a structure that stores vibration and one that drains it away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes, and Something to Stand Them On\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes on M8 threads couple the rack to the floor and level it on boards that are never quite flat. Stainless steel floor-protective discs come in the box, so the spikes can do their job on a wood floor without marking it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMass in the Right Places\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGalvanized steel under powder coating, anodized aluminum columns, laminated MDF shelves. Three materials with three different resonant behaviors, which is the point — no single frequency finds the whole structure sympathetic, so nothing rings in unison.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eKeeping Your Components Cool\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAn open frame lets air move freely around every side of a component, which is something no closed cabinet can offer. Amplifiers and streamers shed heat upward and sideways, and here there is nothing in the way of either.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe adjustable spacing matters here too. A class-A amplifier that runs warm can be given 14.4 inches of clear air while a thin streamer takes 5.7, rather than every component getting the same gap whether it needs it or not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYou Can Build It by Hand\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe columns thread into the shelves by hand and the spikes screw into the column ends. Solidsteel publishes an official installation guide, linked below, and the sequence is worth watching once before you start — assembling each shelf's hardware upside down first makes the whole job quicker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLevel it with the spikes before anything goes on the shelves, not after. A rack that starts level stays level once it is loaded, and the spikes are far easier to reach with nothing standing on top of them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere It Will Live in Your Room\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack and walnut, both on the same structure. The lines are plain enough to sit quietly beside most furniture, which is usually what you want from something holding several thousand dollars of electronics.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel's own installation guide walks through the assembly step by step:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/AfdyFc5POuA\" title=\"Solidsteel S3 Series - Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYuri Brus looks at the three-shelf S3-3 in use:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/hMzjCuMfauw\" title=\"Solidsteel S3-3 HiFi Rack Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel S3 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want a support engineered rather than styled — damping-filled aluminum columns and 132 pounds a shelf come from an audio company, not a furniture maker.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour components are different heights — adjustable spacing from 5.7 to 14.4 inches means the tall amplifier and the slim streamer each get what they need.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou run a turntable — the top platform is the widest surface on the rack, with nothing above it to limit a dust cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour gear runs warm — an open frame puts air on every side, and you choose how much sits above anything that needs it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou expect the system to grow — add a level whenever you need one with an S3 inner shelf and a set of four poles from our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eadd-on shelves\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rack is the foundation; these are what usually go on it and under it:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet or platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — the S3 handles what comes up through the floor, and these address what a component generates on its own.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is sized and sited for one.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnect cables\u003c\/a\u003e — components spread over several levels need longer runs than a single shelf does.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAn add-on shelf and poles\u003c\/a\u003e — the way an S3 grows a level at a time instead of being replaced.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my tall amplifier fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlmost certainly. Shelf positions adjust from 145 to 365 millimeters apart, which is 5.7 to 14.4 inches of clear height. Measure your tallest component, add room for air above it, and set the shelf to suit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSixty kilograms, or 132 pounds. That is per shelf, and it is the figure Solidsteel publishes for the S3 — a step up from the 110 pounds per shelf of the S2 series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. An S3 inner shelf and a set of four poles with hardware will take a three-shelf rack to four, or a four to five. The parts are the same ones the rack was built from, so the result is a factory rack rather than a modification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe columns thread into the shelves by hand and the spikes screw into the ends. Solidsteel publishes a step-by-step installation guide, which is embedded above — watch it once and the sequence is obvious.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere should the turntable go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the top platform. Nothing sits above it, so the dust cover opens freely, it is the widest surface on the rack, and it puts the deck as far as possible from everything else.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat comes in the box besides the rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes on M8 threads, and a set of stainless steel floor-protective discs so the spikes can be used on a finished floor. The hardware to assemble it is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or getting the most from your components? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981871964333,"sku":"NEW-SSS3-3-BLK","price":699.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSS3_3_BLK_01_2023__45461.1708541236.1280.1280_4c918cf5-5cd1-4056-bae6-9557fa152377.jpg?v=1778148844"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-s5-5-five-shelf-audio-rack-with-isolation-platforms-black","title":"Solidsteel S5-5 Five-Shelf Audio Rack with Isolation Platforms - Black","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel S5 — A Second Shelf Floating Above the First\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery level of this rack is two shelves, not one. A structural shelf carries the frame, and a second platform sits above it on four adjustable steel cones seated in cup recesses. Your component never touches the rack itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat is what the isolation platforms in the name actually are, and it is the whole argument for the S5 over Solidsteel’s other racks. It also roughly doubles the mass under each component, which is the other half of the effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill It Take What You Want to Put on It?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Hundred and Twenty-One Pounds a Level\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf carries up to 55 kilograms, or 121 pounds, and that figure is the same whichever level you use. Nothing in a normal system comes close to it, which is the point — the shelf is not working hard, so it stays flat and still.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Bottom Bay Gets Twelve Inches\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the smaller racks the lowest gap is a full 12 inches of clear height, with 8 inches between the levels above it. That bottom bay is where a tall amplifier goes. Taller racks trade some of that height for more levels, so check the size you are buying.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMeasure Against 19.7 Inches\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe usable platform is 19.7 inches wide and 16.9 deep, on a rack 23 inches across overall. Width is what catches people out, so measure your widest chassis against the 19.7-inch figure rather than against the outside of the frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMove the Shelves Where You Want Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel builds the S5 so shelf spacing can be changed at any time rather than being fixed at the factory. A rack bought for one system can be reset for the next one, which is not something most racks at any price will let you do.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Levels of Decoupling, Not One\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration upward, and the components on a rack add their own. Most racks answer that once, at the feet. The S5 answers it twice, and the second answer is the one underneath your equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCones Into Cups, Under Every Component\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe upper platform rests on four adjustable Solidsteel cones dropped into cup recesses inset in the shelf below. Contact happens at four points rather than across a flat face, and the platform can be leveled independently of the rack it sits on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFilled Aluminum Below That\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe support tubes are aluminum filled with StratoCell sound-absorbing foam, the same construction Solidsteel uses right across the S range. A hollow tube rings when something excites it, where a filled one has very little left to give back.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes and Pads at the Floor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes carry the whole rack, reaching through carpet to the floor beneath and leveling it on boards that are never quite true. S Series steel floor pads are included for hardwood and tile.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eNothing Encloses the Electronics\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eNo back, no sides, no doors. Warm air leaves a component upward and sideways into open air, which no closed cabinet can offer whatever is cut into its panels, and cables reach the back of everything without a struggle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe floating platforms help here in a way that is easy to miss. Each one stands clear of the shelf below it on its four cones, so there is a layer of air underneath every component as well as all around it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSet the Cones, Then the Spikes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel publishes a step-by-step installation guide for the series, embedded below, and it is worth watching once before the carton is opened. The rack bolts together and the platforms go on last.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLevel the rack on its floor spikes first, with the shelves empty. Then set each upper platform on its four cones and check it sits without rocking. Doing it in that order means adjusting one thing at a time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePlain Enough to Live With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEnnobled MDF under a polymer laminate, in black, on aluminum supports. The lines are quiet and the rack is 23 inches across, so it sits beside furniture rather than dominating a room the way a wide rack does.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel’s official installation guide for the S5 series, including how the upper platforms seat on their cones:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/6RhUmoa_5Kw\" title=\"Solidsteel S5 Series – Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel S5 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want isolation built into the rack — a second platform on four cones under every component, not just spikes at the floor.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own something heavy — 121 pounds a level, the same on every shelf, so placement is your choice rather than the rack’s.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour system will change — shelf spacing can be reset at any time, so the rack adapts instead of being replaced.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou have a turntable — the top platform has nothing above it and floats on its own cones, which is the best position this rack offers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want to go further still — the platforms are a clean starting point for \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e under a particular source.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is the one with nothing above it and its own decoupled shelf underneath the deck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — for the one component you want to treat separately, on top of a shelf that is already decoupled.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — plan runs around the tall bottom bay, since that is where the amplifier usually ends up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA phono stage\u003c\/a\u003e — small enough to share a level, and it benefits as much as the deck from a platform that is not touching the frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat are the isolation platforms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach level is two shelves. The lower one is structural; the upper one rests on four adjustable steel cones seated in cup recesses, so your component sits on a platform that is not in direct contact with the rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eUp to 55 kilograms, which is 121 pounds, and it applies to every level including the top. That is the figure for the shelf as a whole, platform included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my amplifier fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the smaller racks the bottom bay gives 12 inches of clear height, with 8 inches between the levels above. Check your chassis width against the 19.7 inches of usable platform, which is narrower than the frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I change the shelf spacing later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. Solidsteel builds the S5 so spacing can be adjusted at any time, so a rack set up for one system can be reset when the components change rather than replaced.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt bolts together, and Solidsteel publishes a step-by-step guide which is embedded above. Level the rack on its spikes while it is empty, then set each upper platform on its cones.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it mark my floor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eS Series steel floor pads are included to sit under the adjustable spikes, which is what you want on hardwood or tile. On carpet the spikes can reach through to the floor beneath.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45981957161133,"sku":"NEW-SSS5-5-BLK","price":1599.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSS5_5_01_2023__39183.1708023874.1280.1280_95829681-3a89-4e7c-bef4-dc40196e4e2f.jpg?v=1778149052"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-twin-30-rack-base-black-oak-aluminum-posts","title":"Salamander Synergy Twin 30 Rack Base - Black Oak\/Aluminum Posts","description":"\u003ch3\u003eGet More Room for Your Gear with Synergy Twin Racks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eLarger audio\/video systems need lots of room to spread out, and Twin Racks from Synergy provide the space you need. Modular Synergy racks have height-adjustable shelves and options for adding side and back panels, doors, casters, and accessory drawers. All racks feature strong aluminum posts and oversized composite wood shelves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe January \/ February 2004 issue of \u003cem\u003eDVD ETC.\u003c\/em\u003e magazine awarded the Twin 30 its Top Choice Award as one of the best AV products of 2003. \"The Salamander Synergy system is a modular design, allowing you to build everything from TV stands to full entertainment centers.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSynergy Twin 30: Room for Complete A\/V Systems!\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis beautiful 32\"-tall, eight-shelf rack includes four fully adjustable internal shelves - including one, extra heavy duty shelf which holds up to 250lbs.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Black \/ Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45981963649197,"sku":"NEW-SMSN30-BLK-ALU","price":1179.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSN30_BLKALU_01-Large__18113.1709056098.1280.1280_279f008d-256e-4024-9d80-be0d4c7a3337.jpg?v=1778102851"},{"product_id":"salamander-designs-chameleon-elba-345-speaker-integrated-cabinet-american-cherry","title":"Salamander Designs Chameleon Elba 345 Speaker Integrated Cabinet - American Cherry","description":"\u003ch3\u003eElegant Quadruple Cabinet with Shelf for Center Channel Speaker\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe essence of Elba from Salamander Designs is casual comfort made unique by wide-framed doors with smoked glass inserts. The thick wood cross section at the cabinet top adds a dramatic look. Elba's American Cherry finish complements both traditional and modern furnishings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis handsome cabinet in American Cherry finish displays your large TV at just the right height for many viewing situations. The Elba 345's 88.5\"-wide top platform accommodates large flat panel TVs 90\" or more and weighing up to 350 lbs. The six height-adjustable interior shelves hold up to 75 lbs. each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eA handy 40.5\" wide, 9\" high, and 19.5\" deep multi-function shelf can holds a large center channel speaker. The center segment features a speaker opening with a removable grille designed to hide your speaker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eElba's 'Smart' Aluminum Skeleton\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eElba has a 'smart' aluminum skeleton. This rock-solid framework securely holds an array of high performance accessories while hiding them from view.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eElba is rich with features. All doors are solid wood with smoked glass inserts and have soft-close dampeners. Ventilation louvers are built into the bottoms of cabinet segments to help keep your gear running cooler. Pinch-out rear panels can be removed in seconds for easy access to the backs of components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eExtra Add-on Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe modular design lets you add extra features to your Elba. Add on products include a rear panel cooling fan, media tray, vented interior shelf, rear-panel Panamax power conditioner, and IR repeater system (all sold separately).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Elba 345 is 88.5\" wide, 33.75\" high, and 21.25\" deep. The top shelf supports up to 350 lbs. Six height-adjustable interior shelves support 75 lbs. each.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45982011916461,"sku":"NEW-SMCHELBA345-CHE","price":4999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMCHELBA345_CHE_01_2024__52566.1715908558.1280.1280_89caa0d6-b304-4111-9b4f-85ad1b7003dc.jpg?v=1778153964"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-hyperspike-hf-3-three-shelf-audio-rack-gloss-white","title":"Solidsteel Hyperspike HF-3 Three-Shelf Audio Rack - Gloss White","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel Hyperspike HF — Where Every Upright Ends in a Spike\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMost racks bolt their shelves to a frame. On a Hyperspike the uprights carrying each platform end in a point, and that point sits in a dimple in the upright below it. The rack is a stack of separate levels meeting at contact points rather than one welded structure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat idea is what the range is named after, and it is carried through to the floor, where four large spikes do the same job between the rack and your room. This is the top of Solidsteel’s line, made by hand in Italy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill It Hold What You Have Bought?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Bottom Shelf Is Built for a Power Amplifier\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe lowest bay has 12 inches of clear height where the levels above it have 8. Reviewing the HF-4 for hi-fi+, Alan Sircom called that bottom shelf “power-amp friendly,” which is exactly what it is for: the heaviest, hottest box in the system goes at the bottom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThirty Millimeters of Shelf Under Your Gear\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe lacquered MDF platforms are 30 millimeters thick, which is close to an inch and a quarter and roughly double what most racks use. Each one carries up to 176 pounds, and that figure is the same on the top shelf as on the bottom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eRoom for Gear That Ignores Standard Sizes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThese are the largest shelves Solidsteel makes. The top platform is 25.4 inches wide and 22.1 deep, with 21.1 by 22.1 inches usable on the levels below. That depth is the point — esoteric components rarely respect a standard chassis footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eAdd a Level as the System Grows\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe HF is modular, so a rack gains shelves rather than being replaced. A level needs an inner shelf and a set of four \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/solidsteel-hf-series-hyperspike-add-on-kit-8-inch-polished-steel-posts-w-hardware-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003e8-inch polished steel posts\u003c\/a\u003e with hardware. Call us on 800-942-0220 and we will confirm the shelf in the finish you own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere the Uprights Meet, and Why It Matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration upward and speakers put more of it into the room. A rack either hands that on to the components or gives it somewhere else to go. The Hyperspike system makes its argument at the joints rather than in the materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Spike Into a Dimple, at Every Joint\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf’s uprights end in an adjustable spike with a locking mechanism, seated in a dimple in the upright beneath. Contact between levels happens at four points instead of across flat faces, so every shelf is isolated from the one under it rather than bolted to it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eO-Rings Between the Shelves\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eRubber O-rings sit at those junctions, working much as piston rings do — tightening the fit while cutting what passes across it. Solidsteel calls the whole arrangement the Hyperspike Vibration Free System, and it is the reason the range exists.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFour Spikes, and the Cups That Go Under Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAt the floor, four large spikes carry the whole rack on minimal contact. Four metal cupped feet are supplied with it, and on a suspended wooden floor those are what you want under the spikes rather than the spikes themselves in the boards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eNothing Boxes the Amplifier In\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThere is no back, no side panel and no door anywhere on this rack. A power amplifier on the bottom shelf sheds heat upward and sideways into open air, which is the one thing a closed cabinet cannot offer whatever is cut into its panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe 12-inch bottom bay helps twice over. It takes a tall chassis, and it leaves genuine clearance above a component that runs hot rather than the minimum a shelf spacing happens to allow.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSet It Level Once and Leave It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe rack goes together as a bolt-together frame, and Solidsteel publishes a step-by-step installation guide for the series, embedded below. Watch it before opening the carton and the order of operations makes sense from the start.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLevel it on the spikes before anything goes on the shelves. These are heavy platforms and a fully loaded HF is not something you want to lift to reach a foot underneath, so getting it right while it is empty is time well spent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThink about the floor as well as the rack. Loaded to capacity this is a great deal of weight standing on four points, so on older suspended floorboards use the supplied cups and choose a spot over a joist rather than mid-span.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIt Is Meant to Be Looked At\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe tubular supports are solid INOX stainless steel, an inch and a half across, polished rather than painted. Set against gloss black or gloss white lacquered shelves with rounded, corner-free edges, the frame is the part you see, and it has been finished accordingly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBoth finishes run on the same steel, so the choice is about what the room wants. This is a rack designed to be seen with the equipment on it, not one meant to disappear behind a door.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlan Sircom, reviewing the HF-4 for hi-fi+: “Solidsteel has long been the choice of audio manufacturers at shows and demonstrations worldwide to show off their products in as neutral a way as possible, for good reason.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the rack itself he was direct. What it does, he wrote, is “inspire confidence” — set and leveled, it goes nowhere. He put much of its mass down to the 30mm shelves rather than the steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel’s official installation guide for the HF series, worth watching before the carton is opened:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/xajFSxg38jc\" title=\"Solidsteel HF Series – Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel Hyperspike HF Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own a serious power amplifier — the bottom bay gives 12 inches of clear height and 176 pounds of capacity, with no need to hunt for a shelf that will take it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour components are not standard sizes — these are the largest shelves Solidsteel builds, 22.1 inches deep, for gear that ignores the usual footprint.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want the joints doing the work — spikes into dimples and rubber O-rings at every level, rather than shelves bolted to a single welded frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nThe rack will be seen — polished INOX uprights and gloss lacquered shelves, made by hand in Italy and finished to be looked at.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want to go further under the source — the platforms are neutral enough that \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e sit on top of them cleanly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/solidsteel-hf-series-hyperspike-add-on-kit-8-inch-polished-steel-posts-w-hardware-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eHF-Series 8-inch post kit\u003c\/a\u003e — four polished steel posts with hardware, the other half of adding a level to a rack you already own.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — between a source and its shelf, on a platform neutral enough to make the difference audible either way.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is the widest surface on the rack and has nothing above it, which is where a deck belongs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — work your runs out from where each component will actually sit, since the bottom bay is deeper than the rest.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA maximum of 176 pounds, which is 80 kilograms, and the figure applies to every shelf including the top. The platforms themselves are 30 millimeters of lacquered MDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my power amplifier fit on the bottom shelf?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe bottom bay has 12 inches of clear height against 8 inches for the levels above it, and it is sized deliberately for a large amplifier. Check your chassis width against the 21.1 inches usable between the uprights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat does the Hyperspike name mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf’s uprights end in a locking adjustable spike that seats into a dimple in the upright below, and four larger spikes carry the rack at the floor. Levels meet at points rather than across flat faces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. A level takes an inner shelf and a set of four 8-inch posts with hardware. Call us on 800-942-0220 before ordering and we will confirm the inner shelf available in the finish you have.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill it damage my floor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour metal cupped feet are supplied to sit under the spikes, which is what you want on hardwood, tile or a suspended floor. Fully loaded this rack carries real weight on four points, so use the cups and pick a solid spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the difference between the gloss black and gloss white versions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe shelf lacquer, and nothing else. Both run on the same polished stainless steel uprights with the same dimensions, the same capacity and the same hardware.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45982028300461,"sku":"NEW-SSHF3-GLSWHT","price":3199.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSHF3_GLSWHT_01_2024__92689.1713287776.1280.1280_1f9c28c6-db7a-40b9-a8e2-665ade35cd3f.jpg?v=1778153205"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-twin-20-rack-base-cherry-shelves-black-posts","title":"Salamander Synergy Twin 20 Rack Base - Cherry Shelves - Black Posts","description":"\u003ch3\u003eGet More Room for Your Gear and Enjoy Performance Enhancing Features\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eLarger audio\/video systems need lots of room to spread out, and the Synergy Twin 20 rack from Salamander Designs provides the capacity you need. Modular Synergy racks have height-adjustable shelves and options for adding side and back panels, doors, casters, accessory drawers, and more. All racks feature strong aluminum posts and oversized composite wood shelves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eAs the ideal rack for many audio and home theater systems, Twin 20 has space for six or more A\/V components. The huge top shelf has space for TVs up to 50\" at a height that is ideal for TV viewing. Two internal adjustable shelves are included to hold your audio or video components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Twin 20 is 44.5\" wide, 22\" high, and 19.75\" deep. The top and base shelves measure 44.5\" wide, 19.75\" deep, and 1-1\/8\" thick, while the adjustable shelves are 19.75\" wide, 17.5\" deep, and 3\/4\" thick. The top shelf can hold up to 250 pounds, while the interior shelves can hold up to 75 pounds each.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eSetting the Standard Since the 1990s\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSynergy has set the standard for AV cabinets since the 1990s for entertainment enthusiasts around the world. Today, with every modern feature, style, and furniture advancement, Salamander Designs takes personalization and versatility to a whole new level for homes, thanks to its unique ability to be configured to suit your electronics, vision and space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eBuilt on a modular core, Synergy provides seemingly infinite ways to create your own original, from a simple audio rack to a full-blown media cabinet and beyond.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eEngineered for Top Performance\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSynergy is multi-award-winning system for a reason. There’s nothing else like it. At the heart is a square shaped extruded aluminum support post. This patented S-Frame design permits custom possibilities so you can outfit living rooms, bedrooms, dens, home theaters and\/or music rooms. Posts provide an external cabinet structure to support top, bottom, side and back panels, and are used as an internal structure to support shelves and drawers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eA Rich Choice of Materials\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eFrom beautiful, solid aluminum posts in matte black or silver to a variety of real hardwoods, glass and more, Synergy offers options to create your own design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eCabinet tops and bases come in a fresh, textured Black Oak, a modern light American Cherry and classic Dark Walnut. Side panels are available in matching hardwood, black or perforated steel, while doors can be wood or black glass.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Cherry \/ Black \/ New","offer_id":45982155964589,"sku":"NEW-SMSN20-CHE-BLK","price":959.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSN20_Extrusions_01_2024__94292.1719939888.1280.1280.jpg?v=1778144853"},{"product_id":"salamander-designs-synergy-model-237-walnut-black","title":"Salamander Designs Synergy Model 237 - Walnut\/Black","description":"\u003ch3\u003eOne of Salamander's Most Popular AV Cabinets\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Synergy Model 237 is one of the most popular low-boy, triple-door audio\/video cabinets from Salamander Designs. It holds large amount of gear and will accommodate a large sized TV. This cabinet may mounted to the wall by simply removing the feet and attaching the wall mounting accessory. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis cabinet has three side-by-side doors and a generous amount of space for your AV components inside and on the expansive top platform. The 65.75\"-wide top platform accommodates flat panel TVs up to 75\" and weighing up to 350 lbs. The Model 237 is 21\" tall, and its interior shelves hold up to 75 lb. each. The fixed bottom shelf supports up to 350 lb.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003eRock-Solid Framework\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eLike all Salamander Synergy-series cabinets, the Model 237 has a 'smart' aluminum skeleton with wood veneer surfaces and solid wood door frames. This rock-solid framework securely holds an array of high performance features while hiding them from view. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eModel 237 is rich with features. Perforated door inserts permit IR signals, add ventilation, and mask speakers. Snap-on hinges fully extend doors and remove easily for better in-cabinet access. Removable rear panel allows easy access to A\/V components. Precision leveling feet keep the cabinet level even on uneven floors\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe clever modular design lets you add extra features to your cabinet. A range of attractive finishes blend nicely with any decor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003eDimensions and Weight Capacity\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Model 237 is 65.75\" wide, 21\" high, and 19.75\" deep. Interior dimensions are 19.75” W x 17.75” H x 18” D (per bay). It has three height-adjustable shelves (one per bay) measuring 19.75\" W x 18.5\" D and a fixed bottom shelf. The height-adjustable shelves are 0.5\" thick. The top platform supports up to 350 lb. The total maximum weight capacity is 1000 lb.  \u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Walnut\/Black \/ New","offer_id":45982177296557,"sku":"NEW-SMSB237-WALBLK","price":1999.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSB237_WALBLK_01-Large__26537.1705075664.1280.1280_2677a54a-9c48-404d-947c-3ebb3633c431.jpg?v=1778144757"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-vl-2-two-shelf-vinyl-library-and-audio-rack-walnut","title":"Solidsteel VL-2 Two-Shelf Vinyl Library and Audio Rack - Walnut","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel VL — Fifty Inches Wide, With the Records Built In\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlmost every audio rack is a tower. The VL is not. It runs 50.4 inches across and 16.1 deep, with every shelf divided into two bays side by side, and the bottom pair given over to records rather than electronics.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat shape changes what the rack can do. Gear spreads out instead of stacking up, the collection sits at the same height as the turntable that plays it, and the whole thing stays low enough to see over.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Will a Fifty-Inch Shelf Hold?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Hundred and Sixty Pounds on Every Level\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf is rated at 264.5 pounds, which is 120 kilograms, and Solidsteel tests to that figure. It applies to the top platform and to every shelf below it, so nothing about what you own has to determine where it sits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Bays Side by Side, Not One Long Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach level is split into two usable spaces of 18.9 inches wide. That is the figure to measure your components against, not the 50.4 inches of overall width — a single very wide chassis will not span the divide, but two normal ones sit happily beside each other.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Bottom Bay Is Always the Record Bay\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhichever size you choose, the lowest level is the vinyl shelf and it has 12.8 inches of clear height, which takes a twelve-inch sleeve standing upright with room above it. The gaps between the shelves above are 8.8 inches, sized for components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Top Shelf Takes the Deck and One More Box\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAt 50.4 inches across, the top platform has room for a turntable and something else beside it — a phono stage, an integrated amplifier, a streamer. On a tower rack that second box would have to go on a different level entirely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes Inside the Frame, Not Just Underneath It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration upward and speakers put more of it into the room. What a rack does with that depends on its materials and on how the parts meet each other, and Solidsteel works on both.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFilled Aluminum, Borrowed From the S Series\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe support posts are anodized aluminum filled with a sound-absorbing material, which is the same construction as Solidsteel’s S Series component racks. A hollow tube rings when something excites it; a filled one has far less to give back.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eInner Spikes Where the Parts Meet\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe frame hardware uses spikes internally, so the joints between post and shelf meet at points rather than across flat faces. Outside, adjustable stainless steel spike feet couple the rack to the floor and level it, with protective discs included for hard floors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Full Record Bay Makes It Steadier\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eTwo hundred records weigh close to a hundred pounds, and on this rack all of that sits in the lowest bay. Reviewing the three-shelf VL, StereoNET’s Jay Garrett found that the loaded bottom shelf improved how firmly the rack coupled to the floor through its spikes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eOpen Front and Back, So Cables Reach\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThere is no back panel, no side panel and no door anywhere on the VL. Warm air leaves a component through its top and its flanks without meeting anything, which is the one thing a closed cabinet cannot offer whatever is cut into it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe open back matters just as much for what plugs in. Tonearm leads, a ground wire and power cords all have to get somewhere, and a rack this wide would be very awkward to live with if you had to reach around it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eBuild It Upside Down\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat is the trick, and it comes from someone who has built one. Start with the top shelf face down and work up from there, and the rack assembles far more easily than trying to hold shelves level while you thread posts underneath them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLay the parts out first and check them against the sheet before you start. Some of the bolts have different thread depths at each end, so a methodical five minutes at the beginning saves backtracking later.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOne practical note: the shelves are 50 inches long and the carton is heavy. Getting the box to the room where the rack will live is a two-person job, and it is worth clearing the floor around it before you open anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere the Record Collection Actually Lives\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAround two hundred LPs fit in the bottom bay, split between its two sections and standing upright with their spines facing out. That is a collection you read across rather than one you dig through, sitting directly below the deck that plays it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel builds the VL to be added to. A rack can gain levels as a system grows, so a smaller one becomes a larger one rather than being replaced when the collection outgrows it. Call us on 800-942-0220 about expansion parts before you place an order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLow and Wide, Not Tall and Narrow\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAt 16.1 inches deep and wider than most sideboards, the VL reads as furniture rather than as equipment. Black or walnut shelves in polymeric laminate over 0.9-inch MDF, on a black frame, and the spines of the records become part of how it looks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is built in Italy, and the metal parts that are not aluminum are galvanized and then powder-coated against rust. This is a rack meant for a room people actually sit in, which is exactly where a record collection belongs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eJay Garrett reviewed the three-shelf VL for StereoNET and gave it an Applause Award. It is “a definite contender for those looking to house their hi-fi and records together, as few purpose-designed hi-fi racks offer this,” he wrote.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn build, he found it “a sure improvement over standard flatpack furniture, as it’s been designed with audio in mind,” and reckoned the shelf takes more records than the published figure suggests.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel’s official installation guide for the VL series, worth watching before you open the carton:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/rN0JXWfeWzs\" title=\"Solidsteel VL Series – Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAnd an unboxing and build of a VL, walked through by Solidsteel’s own team:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/795Ep4YDMLM\" title=\"Live Box | VL Series | Unboxing \u0026amp; Installation\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel VL Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want the records beside the deck, not across the room — the bottom bay holds around 200 LPs directly under the turntable that plays them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou have wall space rather than height — 50.4 inches wide and 16.1 deep, low enough to sit under a window or a wall-mounted screen.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own heavy components — 264.5 pounds per shelf, tested, and the same figure on every level from top to bottom.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want two boxes on the top platform — the deck and a phono stage or amplifier fit side by side rather than on separate levels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want the deck steadier still — the posts are filled and spiked already, and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eisolation feet\u003c\/a\u003e under the turntable take it further.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform carries the deck and a second component beside it, with the records one level down.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — between a source and its shelf, for the one component that deserves more than the rack alone.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — a rack 50 inches wide spreads components further apart, so work your runs out from the layout you intend.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/phono-preamplifiers\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA phono stage\u003c\/a\u003e — there is room for one next to the deck on the top shelf, which is the shortest cartridge lead you can give it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow many records will it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAround two hundred twelve-inch LPs in the bottom bay, divided between its two sections. The bay has 12.8 inches of clear height, so sleeves stand upright with room to get a hand in above them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003e264.5 pounds, which is 120 kilograms, and Solidsteel tests each shelf to that figure. It is per shelf rather than shared, and it is the same on the top platform as on the bottom.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill two components fit side by side?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat is what the rack is for. Each level is divided into two usable bays of 18.9 inches wide, so measure your chassis against that figure rather than against the 50.4 inches of overall width.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is a bolt-together job with a single-sheet guide and an official video. Build it upside down starting from the top shelf, lay the hardware out first, and allow for two people to move the carton into the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel designs the VL series to be expanded, so a rack can gain levels as a system grows. Call us on 800-942-0220 before you order and we will confirm what is available for the size you are buying.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat is the difference between the black and walnut versions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe shelf laminate. Both run on the same black aluminum frame with the same hardware, the same capacity and the same dimensions, so the choice is about the room rather than about the rack.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45982194401453,"sku":"NEW-SSVL2W-WAL","price":899.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSVL2_WAL_01_2023__43433.1704307961.1280.1280_912866fd-e301-45f8-8f6b-304c19c9d3a3.jpg?v=1778148890"},{"product_id":"solidsteel-s3-3-three-shelf-audio-rack-walnut","title":"Solidsteel S3-3 Three-Shelf Audio Rack - Walnut","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Solidsteel S3 — Italian Engineering, Built Around What You Put On It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel has been making audio supports in Italy for more than twenty years, and the S3 is where that experience meets a real-world budget. Anodized aluminum columns, powder-coated steel, and shelves cut from laminated MDF, sized for full-width components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWhat separates it from furniture is what happens inside the columns. Each one is filled with damping material, so the structure under your system has somewhere to send the vibration it picks up, instead of handing it straight back to the components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill Your Tallest Component Fit?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEvery shelf measures 580 by 430 millimeters — about 22.8 by 16.9 inches — and is 30 millimeters thick. The top platform gives you that full width. Between the lower shelves the columns bring the usable span to about 19.7 inches, which is still wider than the great majority of full-size components.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSet the Shelves Where Your Amplifier Needs Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThis is the part that decides whether your amplifier goes in. Shelf positions adjust from 145 to 365 millimeters apart — 5.7 to 14.4 inches — so a tall tube amplifier or a stacked pair of small boxes can have the room it needs, taken from a shelf that does not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePut Your Heaviest Amplifier on Any Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf carries up to 60 kilograms, or 132 pounds. That is a serious power amplifier per level, not a nominal figure, and it comes from columns that thread together rather than welded joints that flex.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIt Grows With the System\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe S3 is built to be added to. An inner shelf and a set of four poles turn a three-shelf rack into a four, or a four into a five, using the same hardware the rack was assembled with — so the rack you buy now is not the rack you are stuck with.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYour Turntable Goes on the Top Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlways. The top platform has nothing above it, so a dust cover opens freely, and it is the one position where the deck sits farthest from everything else that vibrates. It is also the widest surface on the rack. Browse our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eturntables\u003c\/a\u003e for the deck to put there.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow It Manages Vibration\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFloors carry vibration. Speakers put it into the room, the room puts it back into the floor, and whatever your components stand on either passes it along or gives it somewhere to go. That is the whole argument for a proper rack rather than a shelf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy These Columns Don't Ring\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe S3's support poles are anodized aluminum, and each is filled internally with sound-absorbing damping material. A hollow tube rings; a filled one does not. That is the difference between a structure that stores vibration and one that drains it away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSpikes, and Something to Stand Them On\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes on M8 threads couple the rack to the floor and level it on boards that are never quite flat. Stainless steel floor-protective discs come in the box, so the spikes can do their job on a wood floor without marking it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMass in the Right Places\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eGalvanized steel under powder coating, anodized aluminum columns, laminated MDF shelves. Three materials with three different resonant behaviors, which is the point — no single frequency finds the whole structure sympathetic, so nothing rings in unison.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eKeeping Your Components Cool\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAn open frame lets air move freely around every side of a component, which is something no closed cabinet can offer. Amplifiers and streamers shed heat upward and sideways, and here there is nothing in the way of either.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe adjustable spacing matters here too. A class-A amplifier that runs warm can be given 14.4 inches of clear air while a thin streamer takes 5.7, rather than every component getting the same gap whether it needs it or not.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eYou Can Build It by Hand\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe columns thread into the shelves by hand and the spikes screw into the column ends. Solidsteel publishes an official installation guide, linked below, and the sequence is worth watching once before you start — assembling each shelf's hardware upside down first makes the whole job quicker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eLevel it with the spikes before anything goes on the shelves, not after. A rack that starts level stays level once it is loaded, and the spikes are far easier to reach with nothing standing on top of them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere It Will Live in Your Room\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack and walnut, both on the same structure. The lines are plain enough to sit quietly beside most furniture, which is usually what you want from something holding several thousand dollars of electronics.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSolidsteel's own installation guide walks through the assembly step by step:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/AfdyFc5POuA\" title=\"Solidsteel S3 Series - Official Installation Guide\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYuri Brus looks at the three-shelf S3-3 in use:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/hMzjCuMfauw\" title=\"Solidsteel S3-3 HiFi Rack Review\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Solidsteel S3 Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want a support engineered rather than styled — damping-filled aluminum columns and 132 pounds a shelf come from an audio company, not a furniture maker.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour components are different heights — adjustable spacing from 5.7 to 14.4 inches means the tall amplifier and the slim streamer each get what they need.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou run a turntable — the top platform is the widest surface on the rack, with nothing above it to limit a dust cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour gear runs warm — an open frame puts air on every side, and you choose how much sits above anything that needs it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou expect the system to grow — add a level whenever you need one with an S3 inner shelf and a set of four poles from our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eadd-on shelves\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA rack is the foundation; these are what usually go on it and under it:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet or platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — the S3 handles what comes up through the floor, and these address what a component generates on its own.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/turntables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eA turntable\u003c\/a\u003e — the top platform is sized and sited for one.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnect cables\u003c\/a\u003e — components spread over several levels need longer runs than a single shelf does.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAn add-on shelf and poles\u003c\/a\u003e — the way an S3 grows a level at a time instead of being replaced.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my tall amplifier fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlmost certainly. Shelf positions adjust from 145 to 365 millimeters apart, which is 5.7 to 14.4 inches of clear height. Measure your tallest component, add room for air above it, and set the shelf to suit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSixty kilograms, or 132 pounds. That is per shelf, and it is the figure Solidsteel publishes for the S3 — a step up from the 110 pounds per shelf of the S2 series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. An S3 inner shelf and a set of four poles with hardware will take a three-shelf rack to four, or a four to five. The parts are the same ones the rack was built from, so the result is a factory rack rather than a modification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe columns thread into the shelves by hand and the spikes screw into the ends. Solidsteel publishes a step-by-step installation guide, which is embedded above — watch it once and the sequence is obvious.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhere should the turntable go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eOn the top platform. Nothing sits above it, so the dust cover opens freely, it is the widest surface on the rack, and it puts the deck as far as possible from everything else.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat comes in the box besides the rack?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable stainless steel spikes on M8 threads, and a set of stainless steel floor-protective discs so the spikes can be used on a finished floor. The hardware to assemble it is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or getting the most from your components? Visit our \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eLearning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for guides, tips, and expert advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Solidsteel","offers":[{"title":"New","offer_id":45982215700653,"sku":"NEW-SSS3W-3-WAL","price":799.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SSS3_3_WAL_01_2023__17209.1707946966.1280.1280_78fca36c-ec11-4244-af72-fad8666e14cb.jpg?v=1778148865"},{"product_id":"salamander-archetype-5-0-5-shelf-audio-rack-real-cherry-wood","title":"Salamander Archetype 5.0 - 5-Shelf Audio Rack - Real Cherry Wood","description":"\u003cdiv style=\"max-width:720px;margin:0 auto;padding:32px 24px 48px 24px;background:#ffffff;\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:0 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Salamander Archetype — Shelves That Go Exactly Where You Want Them\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eMost racks decide the spacing for you. Four threaded steel rods run the height of an Archetype, and every shelf is held between nuts and washers that you can put anywhere along them. There are no notches, no pegs and no fixed positions to design your system around.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSalamander has built it this way since the company started, and the idea has outlasted several generations of the equipment it holds. A rack whose shelves move is a rack you can keep when the components change.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow Much Will It Hold, and Where?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eA Hundred and Fifty Pounds Per Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThat is the figure for every shelf on every Archetype, and it is a long way beyond what most racks in this class manage. A heavy power amplifier is not a problem to be solved here, and there is no bottom-shelf-only rule to work around.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePut the Shelves Where Your Gear Needs Them\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSpacing is set by where you tighten the nuts, so it is continuous rather than stepped. A tall tube amplifier and a slim streamer can sit on the same rack with completely different clearances, decided by what you own rather than by where a notch happened to fall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eMeasure Against 19.25 Inches, Not the Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf is 23 inches wide and 16 deep in three-quarter-inch wood, but the usable figure is the 19.25 inches of clear space between the steel rods. That is what your widest component has to pass, so start there when you are checking whether something fits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eTwo Different Ways to Make It Bigger\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA single shelf adds a level inside the rack you already own, threading onto the same rods. The other route is the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-stacking-kit-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype Stacking Kit\u003c\/a\u003e — four coupling nuts that join two complete racks into one taller one. Those are different jobs, so order by what you actually want.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eThe Rubber Washers Are the Point\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA floor carries vibration and every component on a rack puts some of its own into the frame. What matters is whether that travels on to the next shelf, and on an Archetype the answer is designed rather than accidental.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eNeoprene Above and Below Every Shelf\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eEach shelf is clamped between steel nuts and washers, with energy-damping neoprene washers sitting between the hardware and the wood on both faces. Nothing rigid touches the shelf itself, so the steel rods are not a direct path from one component to the next.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eChoose What Meets the Floor\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eThe rack stands on its own feet as it comes, and what happens underneath is up to you. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-mega-spikes-set-of-4-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eMega Spikes\u003c\/a\u003e couple it through carpet to the floor below; casters let you roll the whole thing out to reach the back of everything.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eGive the Hot Box the Gap It Needs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAn open frame with no back panel, no sides and no doors lets air move freely past every face of a component. That is a property of the design itself, and no closed cabinet can offer it however many vents have been cut into the panels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAdjustable spacing matters more here than on most racks. A class-A amplifier that runs warm can be given several inches of clear air above it while a slim source takes the minimum, instead of every component getting an identical gap.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Building It Actually Involves\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eFour rods, and a stack of nuts and washers for each shelf. You thread the hardware on, slide a shelf down to where you want it, and tighten from both sides. Work out your spacing before you start and the job goes in one pass rather than two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSet the height of every shelf while the rack is empty, with a tape measure and the tallest component beside you. The same hardware that makes the spacing adjustable is what you would otherwise be loosening later with gear in your way.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eReal Wood, and Black Steel Through It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eBlack, Cherry and Walnut, in real wood rather than a printed wrap, which is why the grain differs from shelf to shelf. The threaded rods and hardware are black on every finish — a deliberate constant, so the frame reads the same whichever wood you choose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eShelves are three-quarters of an inch thick and carry their own weight visually as well as structurally. This is the line to pick when the rack has to sit in a room with furniture in it rather than in a dedicated listening space.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat Reviewers Are Saying\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eHome Theater Review put the five-shelf Archetype through a full write-up. “These are high-quality racks that offer more than their price point would lead you to believe,” the reviewer concluded, calling the shelving “infinitely adjustable.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWriting in August 2008, the same reviewer called it “an affordable and completely flexible system that will proudly hold the finest of AV gear in style” — and the rack has not changed since.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eSee It in Action\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA full build of an Archetype from the box up, which is worth watching once before you plan your shelf heights:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/142p7kzgWsw\" title=\"How to Build the Salamander Archetype\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAnd Salamander’s own walkthrough of the system and what can be added to it:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ciframe width=\"100%\" height=\"360\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube.com\/embed\/7fgLcBrh2_Q\" title=\"Salamander rAVe Podcast – Archetype\" style=\"border:0;margin:0 0 0.9em 0;display:block;\" allowfullscreen\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWho Is the Salamander Archetype Best For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou own something genuinely heavy — 150 pounds per shelf is the figure on every level, so the big amplifier goes wherever you want it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour components are different heights — shelf spacing is continuous rather than stepped, so each one gets the clearance it actually needs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want real wood in the room — Black, Cherry and Walnut in solid finishes, sized to sit among furniture rather than dominate it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYour system will change — add a single shelf inside the rack, or join two racks with the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-stacking-kit-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eStacking Kit\u003c\/a\u003e when one is no longer enough.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nYou want to reach behind everything — an \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-drawer-black\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype drawer\u003c\/a\u003e for accessories and casters underneath make the back of the system reachable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003ePairs Well With\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/add-on-rack-shelves\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype single shelves\u003c\/a\u003e — a shelf and its hardware, threading onto the rods you already have, in the finish to match.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/products\/salamander-archetype-stacking-kit-set-of-4\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eArchetype Stacking Kit\u003c\/a\u003e — four coupling nuts that join two racks into one taller unit when adding a shelf is no longer enough.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/isolation-components\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eIsolation feet and platforms\u003c\/a\u003e — between a component and its shelf, where a source deserves more than the rack alone provides.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/interconnect-cables\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eInterconnects\u003c\/a\u003e — work out your runs after you have set the shelf heights, since the spacing is yours to decide.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow much weight will each shelf hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eA hundred and fifty pounds, per shelf rather than shared across the rack, and the same on every level. The shelf itself is three-quarters of an inch of wood on 5\/8-inch threaded steel rods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWill my tall amplifier fit between the shelves?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eAlmost certainly, because you decide the gap. The shelves clamp anywhere along the rods, so measure your tallest component and set the spacing to suit it. Check its width against the 19.25 inches clear between the rods too.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eCan I add a shelf later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes, in two different ways. A single shelf threads onto the rods you already have to add a level inside the rack. The Stacking Kit instead joins two complete racks together, which is the route to take when one rack is full.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eHow hard is it to assemble?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eIt is a nuts-and-washers job rather than a snap-together one, and that is the trade for spacing you set yourself. Decide your shelf heights first, with the components measured, and the whole rack goes together in a single pass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eIs the wood real?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eYes. The shelves are real wood rather than a printed vinyl wrap, so grain and tone vary a little between shelves and between racks. The threaded rods and hardware are black across every finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 style=\"font-size:1.05em;margin:0.9em 0 0.25em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhat can I add to it later?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eSingle shelves, the Stacking Kit, a storage drawer, arched bookends, spike feet and two grades of caster. The system was designed to be added to, and the parts still fit racks built many years ago.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eWhy Audio Advisor?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;padding-left:1.4em;line-height:1.6;\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n40+ Years of Expertise — Since 1981, we've helped over a million music lovers find the right gear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n60-Day Money-Back Guarantee — Take your time. Listen, enjoy, and make sure it's right for you.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nReal Experts, Real Help — Our team is here to answer your questions at 800-942-0220, weekdays 9am–6pm EST.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFree Shipping — On orders over $49, delivered to your door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\nFlexible Payment Options — Financing available so you can start listening now.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"font-size:1.25em;margin:1.4em 0 0.35em 0;font-weight:600;\"\u003eLearn More\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0 0 0.9em 0;line-height:1.55;\"\u003eWant to learn more about setting up a system, managing vibration, or choosing the right support for your gear? Visit the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/learningcenter.audioadvisor.com\/\" style=\"color:#8a5a2b;\"\u003eAudio Advisor Learning Center\u003c\/a\u003e for buying guides, setup advice, and answers from people who do this every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:1.6em 0 0 0;font-size:0.9em;\"\u003e\n\u003cimg style=\"vertical-align: middle;padding-right: 5px;\" src=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/p65-warning-icon.png\" width=\"25\" height=\"25\" alt=\"warning icon\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-weight:bold;font-size: 14px;\"\u003eWARNING:\u003c\/span\u003e Cancer and Reproductive Harm - \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.p65warnings.ca.gov\/\" title=\"California Proposition 65 link\" target=\"_blank\" style=\"text-decoration: none;color: #2f84eb;\"\u003ewww.P65Warnings.ca.gov\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Cherry \/ New","offer_id":45982725636269,"sku":"NEW-SMA5-CHE","price":699.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMA5_CHE_01-Large__12431.1691607582.1280.1280_92de73c7-5f1c-4ed8-ba46-afa6c7919ab4.jpg?v=1778133104"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-twin-30-oc-with-double-width-shelf-walnut-alumium","title":"Salamander Synergy Twin 30 OC with Double-Width Shelf - Walnut\/Alumium","description":"\u003ci\u003eShown with optional perforated steel doors and solid wood side panels.\u003c\/i\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003eSupport Your TV, Center Speaker, and More\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eSalamander adds new functionality to its best-selling Synergy Twin 30 TV rack with the Twin 30 Center by including a double-width shelf for your center channel speaker. This shelf is 44.5\" wide and 19.75\" deep, with 9 inches of vertical height. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThis furniture-quality rack enhances both the appearance and performance of home theater equipment. With its rich wood finish and elegant styling, it looks like a piece of fine furniture. But Salamander's Synergy Twin 30 Center TV stand is a hard worker that provides plenty of space for AV components, with a bottom shelf that accommodates two 17\"-wide components and two adjustable height internal shelves for holding two more components. The top platform will support large TVs, including plasma displays up to 42 inches.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Salamander Twin 30 Center TV cabinet is a high-end piece of furniture with a mile-deep hardwood finish and exquisitely clean design. The warmth of the rich hardwood finish seems to radiate throughout the entire room. The quality recalls the finest classic American and European cabinetry. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eAdd Doors and Cabinet Sides\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe modular design of the Twin 30 Center lets you add doors, cabinet sides, and other accessories for extra versatility and design possibilities. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch5\u003eHolds Lots of Gear\u003c\/h5\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003e The 44.5\"-wide top shelf has space for 32\"-42\" flat panel TVs at the ideal height. The bottom shelf accommodates two standard-width components. Two height-adjustable internal shelves hold an additional two components. The Twin 30 Center includes a removable black rear panel with a wire management feature that keeps cables out of sight and out of the way. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe Twin 30 Center is 31\" high, 44.5\" wide, and 19.75\" deep. Adjustable level glide feet are included. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cimg style=\"vertical-align: middle;padding-right: 5px;\" src=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/p65-warning-icon.png\" width=\"25\" height=\"25\" alt=\"warning icon\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"font-weight:bold;font-size: 14px;\"\u003eWARNING:\u003c\/span\u003e Cancer and Reproductive Harm - \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.p65warnings.ca.gov\/\" title=\"California Proposition 65 link\" target=\"_blank\" style=\"text-decoration: none;color: #2f84eb;\"\u003ewww.P65Warnings.ca.gov\u003c\/a\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45982737039533,"sku":"NEW-SMSNC30-WAL-ALU","price":1179.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSNC30WALALU__24552.1689623319.1280.1280_ff219eb7-754a-42a7-8060-b426a3742623.jpg?v=1778116815"},{"product_id":"salamander-synergy-twin-20-rack-base-walnut-shelves-aluminum-posts","title":"Salamander Synergy Twin 20 Rack Base - Walnut Shelves - Aluminum Posts","description":"\u003ch3\u003eGet More Room for Your Gear with Synergy Twin Racks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eLarger audio\/video systems need lots of room to spread out, and Twin Racks from Synergy provide the space you need. Modular Synergy racks have height-adjustable shelves and options for adding side and back panels, doors, casters, and accessory drawers. All racks feature strong aluminum posts and oversized composite wood shelves.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSynergy Twin20: Ideal for A\/V Systems\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp align=\"justify\"\u003eThe ideal rack for many audio and home theater systems, Twin 20 has space for six or more A\/V components. The huge top shelf has space for 32\"-35\" TVs and large turntables like VPI's TNT. The height is ideal for TV viewing. Two internal adjustable shelves are included to hold your audio or video components.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Salamander","offers":[{"title":"Walnut \/ Aluminum \/ New","offer_id":45982779670701,"sku":"NEW-SMSN20-WAL-ALU","price":959.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0750\/3708\/1773\/files\/SMSN20_WAL_ALU_01_2024__70375.1709234830.1280.1280_f2b556c9-44b9-47c2-909f-cc5dc4a6a209.jpg?v=1778116856"}],"url":"https:\/\/www.audioadvisor.com\/collections\/a-v-racks-and-cabinets.oembed?page=6","provider":"Audio Advisor","version":"1.0","type":"link"}